OMRON - Electric Automation Network

OMRON - Electric Automation Network

At the end of this document you will find links to products related to this catalog. You can go directly to our shop by clicking HERE.

HERE

Cat. No. V074-E1-07

NS-Series

NS-NSDC1-V6

NS-Designer

OPERATION MANUAL

Notice:

OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.

The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.

DANGER

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.

WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.

Caution

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury, or property damage.

OMRON Product References

All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word "Unit" is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.

The abbreviation "Ch," which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means

"word" and is abbreviated "Wd" in documentation in this sense.

Visual Aids

The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information.

Note

Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.

1, 2, 3...

1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.

OMRON, 2002

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of

OMRON.

No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.

P-1

Preliminary Material

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Introduction

Introduction

Thank you for purchasing the NS-Designer.

The NS-Designer is a software package that enables creating and maintaining screen data for

OMRON NS-series Programmable Terminals.

To take full advantage of the NS-series Programmable Terminals, please be sure that you understand the functions and performance of the NS-Designer before attempting to use it. When using an

NS-series PT, please also refer to the

NS Series Setup Manual

and the

NS Series Programming

Manual.

Intended Audience

This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).

Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities.

Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.

Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA systems.

Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.

Precaution

The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.

Do not use the PT touch switch input functions for applications where danger to human life or serious property damage is possible, or for emergency switch applications.

Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult

• your OMRON representative.

Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the systems, machines, and equipment with

• double safety mechanisms.

This manual provides information for using the NS-Designer. Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the NS-Designer and keep this manual close at hand for reference during installation and operation.

P-2

Preliminary Material

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Notation and Terminology

Notation and Terminology

The following notation and terminology are used in this manual.

Notation

The following notation is used in this manual.

Note

Indicates additional information on operation, descriptions, or settings.

Note

Terminology

PT

PLC

In this manual, indicates an NS-series Programmable Terminal.

Indicates OMRON Programmable Controllers.

Host Indicates the PLC, FA computer, or personal computer functioning as the control device and interfaced with the NS-series PT.

P-3

Preliminary Material

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Related Manuals

Related Manuals

The following manuals are used for NS-series PTs. (The boxes at the end of the catalog numbers indicate the revision code.)

This manual

NS-Designer Operating Procedures:

NS-Designer Operation Manual.......................................................................V074-E1-

@

Describes operating procedures for the NS-Designer, which is used to create the screens displayed on the PT and transfer them to the PT. It includes screen creation and transfer procedures. Refer to this manual for information on operating methods and detailed operating procedures.

This manual deals with details of NS-Designer operation. Refer to the following manuals for information on NS-series PT operation.

Detailed Setting Methods for Functional Objects and Other Objects:

NS Series Programming Manual......................................................................V073-E1-

@

Describes the screen configurations, object functions, and host communications for the PT.

Basic NS-series PT Functions, Operations, and Limitations:

NS series -V1/-V2 Setup Manual ......................................................................V083-E1-

@

Provides information on NS Series -V1 models (i.e., NS12-V1, NS10-V1, NS8-V1, and NS5-V1), and

NS Series -V2 models (i.e., NS5-V2).

Describes how to connect the PT to the host and peripheral devices, methods to setup communications and operation, and procedures for maintenance.

Refer to the

NS Series Programming Manual

([email protected] ) for information on PT functions and specific operating procedures.

First-time Users of NS-series Programmable Terminals:

Tutorial (Installed from NS-Designer CD-ROM.)

This tutorial is designed for first-time users of NS-series PTs. It provides examples of operations from creating a simple screen through starting actual operation. When the NS-Designer is installed, the tutorial is installed on the hard disk as PDF files.

NS-series Macro Function:

Macro Reference (Installed from NS-Designer CD-ROM.)

The online help for the NS-Designer contains detailed information on the NS-series macro functions.

The

Macro Reference

contains essentially the same information, and it is installed on the hard disk as

PDF Files when the NS-Designer is installed. Use either the online help or the

Macro Reference

, whichever is more convenient.

Confirming PLC Functions and Operation:

PLC Operation Manuals

Refer to the operation manuals for individual PLC Units (e.g., the CPU Unit, Special I/O Units, CPU

Bus Units, Communications Units, etc) to obtain information on PLC functions and operation.

P-4

Read and Understand This Manual

Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments.

Warranty and Limitations of Liability

WARRANTY

OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.

OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING

NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE

PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS

DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED

USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY

OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS

OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH

CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT LIABILITY.

In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted.

IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS

REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE

PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO

CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.

P-5

Application Considerations

SUITABILITY FOR USE

OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.

At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use.

The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products:

Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this manual.

Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations.

Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property

.

Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.

NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY

WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS,

AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE

WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.

PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS

OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any consequence thereof.

P-6

Disclaimers

CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS

Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons.

It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown.

PERFORMANCE DATA

Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability.

ERRORS AND OMISSIONS

The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.

P-7

Contents

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Contents

Notice .......................................................................................................................................................... 1

Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... 2

Notation and Terminology ...................................................................................................................................... 3

Related Manuals ...................................................................................................................................................... 4

Read and Understand This Manual ......................................................................................................................... 5

Application Considerations ..................................................................................................................................... 6

Disclaimers .......................................................................................................................................................... 7

Section 1 Overview

1-1 The NS-Designer........................................................................................................................................1-1

1-2 System Requirements.................................................................................................................................1-3

1-2-1 Hardware..........................................................................................................................................1-3

1-2-2 Equipment Required to Transfer Screen Data..................................................................................1-3

1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions ............................................................................................................1-4

1-3-2 Manipulating Data on the PLC ........................................................................................................1-5

1-3-4

1-3-5

Host Registration and Address.........................................................................................................1-7

Screen Types and Applications........................................................................................................1-7

1-3-7 Functions Used to Create Screens..................................................................................................1-10

1-3-9 Alarms/Events................................................................................................................................1-13

1-3-12 Importing and Exporting CSV Files...............................................................................................1-16

1-3-13 Validating.......................................................................................................................................1-16

1-4 Outline of Operational Flow ....................................................................................................................1-17

1-5 Menu Commands .....................................................................................................................................1-18

1-6 Functions Added in Version 3.0...............................................................................................................1-21

1-7 Functions Added in Version 4.0...............................................................................................................1-22

1-8 Functions Added in Version 5.0...............................................................................................................1-22

1-9 Functions Added in Version 6.0...............................................................................................................1-22

1-10 Functions Added in Version 6.2...............................................................................................................1-23

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

2-1 Before Installing the NS-Designer .............................................................................................................2-1

2-2 Installing the NS-Designer .........................................................................................................................2-2

2-2-1 Basic Installation Operations ...........................................................................................................2-2

2-2-3 Uninstalling......................................................................................................................................2-7

2-2-4 Installing USB Drivers for NS-Series PTs. ......................................................................................2-9

2-3 Starting the NS-Designer .........................................................................................................................2-14

2-4 Exiting the NS-Designer ..........................................................................................................................2-15

2-5 User Interface ...........................................................................................................................................2-16

2-5-1

2-5-2

Basic Screen Functions ..................................................................................................................2-16

Dialog Box Main Functions ...........................................................................................................2-21

i

Contents

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

3-1 Projects.......................................................................................................................................................3-1

3-2 Creating New Projects................................................................................................................................3-2

3-3 Opening Existing Projects..........................................................................................................................3-3

3-4 Saving Projects...........................................................................................................................................3-5

3-5 Saving a Project Under a Different Name..................................................................................................3-7

3-6 Opening Recent Projects ............................................................................................................................3-8

3-7 Opening Template Projects ........................................................................................................................3-9

3-7-1 Specifying Template Projects (Flowchart Step 1)..........................................................................3-10

3-7-2

3-7-3

Reusing Screens (Flowchart Steps 2 to 4)......................................................................................3-10

Canceling Template Projects..........................................................................................................3-11

3-8 Project Maintenance.................................................................................................................................3-12

3-8-1 Procedures......................................................................................................................................3-12

3-9 Project Properties .....................................................................................................................................3-17

3-9-1 Procedure .......................................................................................................................................3-17

3-10 Changing the PT Model ...........................................................................................................................3-21

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

4-1 Basic Operations ........................................................................................................................................4-1

4-1-1 Setting Screen Properties .................................................................................................................4-1

4-1-3

4-1-4

Switching Items Displayed for Objects............................................................................................4-5

Changing the Display.....................................................................................................................4-14

4-1-6 Show Touch Points ........................................................................................................................4-16

4-1-7 Zoom..............................................................................................................................................4-16

4-1-8 Refreshing ......................................................................................................................................4-17

4-2 Creating and Saving Screens....................................................................................................................4-18

4-2-1 Creating New Screens ....................................................................................................................4-18

4-1-3 Procedure .......................................................................................................................................4-23

4-3 Sheets .....................................................................................................................................................4-24

4-3-1

4-3-2

Creating New Sheets......................................................................................................................4-24

Opening Existing Sheets ................................................................................................................4-25

4-3-5 Applying Sheets .............................................................................................................................4-26

4-4 Frames .....................................................................................................................................................4-28

4-4-1 Creating Frame Tab Names ...........................................................................................................4-30

4-4-2 Switching Frame Pages ..................................................................................................................4-31

Section 5 Object Operations

5-1 Creating Functional Objects.......................................................................................................................5-1

5-1-1 Creating One Object at a Time.........................................................................................................5-1

5-1-3 Creating Functional Objects Using Tables.......................................................................................5-3

ii

Contents

NS-Designer Operation Manual

5-2 Creating Fixed Objects...............................................................................................................................5-8

5-2-1 Drawing New Fixed Objects............................................................................................................5-8

5-3 Pop-up Menus ..........................................................................................................................................5-12

5-4 Editing .....................................................................................................................................................5-13

5-4-1

5-4-2

Undo...............................................................................................................................................5-13

Redo ...............................................................................................................................................5-13

5-4-3 Cut..................................................................................................................................................5-14

5-4-4 Copy...............................................................................................................................................5-15

5-4-5 Paste ...............................................................................................................................................5-16

5-4-6 Delete .............................................................................................................................................5-17

5-4-7 Find ................................................................................................................................................5-17

5-4-8 Replace...........................................................................................................................................5-20

5-4-10 Repeat ............................................................................................................................................5-24

5-5 Layout Functions......................................................................................................................................5-25

5-5-2 Moving Objects..............................................................................................................................5-25

5-5-3

5-5-4

Aligning and Distributing Objects .................................................................................................5-26

Make Same Size.............................................................................................................................5-27

5-5-7 Rotating and Flipping Objects .......................................................................................................5-30

5-5-9 Grouping and Ungrouping Objects ................................................................................................5-33

5-6 Colors .....................................................................................................................................................5-35

5-7 Address Settings.......................................................................................................................................5-36

5-7-2 Registering Hosts ...........................................................................................................................5-38

5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists ..................................................................................5-42

5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used ..............................................................................................................5-46

5-9-1 Displaying Lists of Used Functional Objects.................................................................................5-46

5-9-2 Jumping to Screens, Tables, and Frames .......................................................................................5-48

5-10 Batch Settings...........................................................................................................................................5-49

5-11 Listing Addresses Used............................................................................................................................5-55

5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses....................................................................................................................5-59

5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects ................................................................................................5-63

5-14 Object Defaults.........................................................................................................................................5-68

5-14-2 Resetting Defined Defaults ............................................................................................................5-68

5-15 Editing Background Bitmaps ...................................................................................................................5-70

5-16 Options .....................................................................................................................................................5-71

5-16-2 Edit/Disp. .......................................................................................................................................5-71

5-16-3 Editor..............................................................................................................................................5-72

5-16-4 Labels.............................................................................................................................................5-72

iii

Contents

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Section 6 Programming Macros

6-1 Registering Macros ....................................................................................................................................6-1

6-1-1

6-1-2

Registering Macros to Projects ........................................................................................................6-2

Registering Macros to Functional Objects .......................................................................................6-5

6-2 List of Error Messages ...............................................................................................................................6-8

Section 7 System Settings

7-1 Settings.......................................................................................................................................................7-1

7-1-3 Initial ................................................................................................................................................7-2

7-1-4 History..............................................................................................................................................7-4

7-1-5 Comm-All ........................................................................................................................................7-5

7-1-6 Detailed ..........................................................................................................................................7-10

7-1-7 Printer.............................................................................................................................................7-16

7-1-8 Video..............................................................................................................................................7-17

Section 8 Testing

8-1 Test Function..............................................................................................................................................8-1

8-2 Test Tool ....................................................................................................................................................8-6

Section 9 Validation

9-1 Validation Settings .....................................................................................................................................9-1

9-2 Validation Results ......................................................................................................................................9-2

9-2-1 No Error Detected ............................................................................................................................9-2

9-3 List of Validation Items..............................................................................................................................9-4

Section 10 Transferring Data

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT......................................................................................................................10-1

10-1-1 Preparations and Procedures before Connecting............................................................................10-2

10-1-2 Communications Settings for NS-Designer .................................................................................10-14

10-1-3 Transferring Project Data.............................................................................................................10-20

10-1-4 Transferring Screen Data .............................................................................................................10-23

10-1-5 Transferring the System Program ................................................................................................10-25

10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card......................................................................................10-29

10-2-1 Preparations for Transferring to a Memory Card in PT ...............................................................10-29

10-2-2 Procedure for Transferring Data to a Memory Card in the PT.....................................................10-31

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA ...................................................................................................................10-33

10-3-1 Overview of SPMA......................................................................................................................10-33

10-3-4 Procedural Example .....................................................................................................................10-36

iv

Contents

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Section 11 Printing

11-1 Printing Project Information.....................................................................................................................11-1

11-2 Printing Page Information ........................................................................................................................11-4

11-3 Previews ...................................................................................................................................................11-8

11-4 Outputting to an RTF File ........................................................................................................................11-9

11-5 Headers and Footers...............................................................................................................................11-10

11-6 Margins ..................................................................................................................................................11-12

Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files

12-1 Exporting CSV Files ................................................................................................................................12-1

12-2 Editing CSV Files ....................................................................................................................................12-2

12-3 Importing CSV Files ................................................................................................................................12-3

Section 13 Multi-language Display

13-1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................13-1

13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens................................................................................................13-2

13-2-1 Inputting Multi-language Characters in NS-Designer Property Settings .......................................13-2

13-2-3 Creating Multi-language Display Screens Using the CSV Import/Export Function....................13-11

Appendices

Appendix 1 Quick Reference ........................................................................................................................... A-1

Appendix 2 Objects ........................................................................................................................................ A-12

Appendix 3 Shortcut Keys.............................................................................................................................. A-16

Appendix 4 Version Information.................................................................................................................... A-17

Appendix 5 Resource Report.......................................................................................................................... A-18

Appendix 6 Error Messages ........................................................................................................................... A-19

Appendix 7 Connecting Cable Specifications ................................................................................................ A-26

Appendix 8 Details of CLK Status ................................................................................................................. A-28

Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products ......................................... A-31

v

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Section 1 Overview

This section describes the specifications and functions of the NS-Designer to provide a basic understanding of the capabilities of the NS-Designer for first-time users.

1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions..............................................................................................................1-4

1-4 Outline of Operational Flow ......................................................................................................................1-17

1-6 Functions Added in Version 3.0 ................................................................................................................1-21

1-7 Functions Added in Version 4.0 ................................................................................................................1-22

1-8 Functions Added in Version 5.0 ................................................................................................................1-22

1-9 Functions Added in Version 6.0 ................................................................................................................1-22

1-10 Functions Added in Version 6.2 ................................................................................................................1-23

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-1 The NS-Designer

The NS-Designer is an application software package that can be run on Windows 95, 98, NT, Me, 2000, or XP to create screen data for NS-series Programmable Terminals (referred to as "PTs").

The NS-Designer enables using a graphic Windows interface and Windows operating environment so that screens can be created simply and easily by practically anyone.

The data created on the NS-Designer consists of the following objects.

Data created on

NS-Designer

(project)

User screens Fixed objects

Functional objects

Sheets

Numeric units and scale settings

Alarm/event settings

Data log settings

Data block settings

Tables

Frames

Backgrounds

Fixed objects

Functional objects

Tables

Frames

Library

Rectangles

Circles/ovals

Lines

Polylines

Polygons

Sectors

Arcs

Buttons

Lamps

Display and input

Display

System clock

Alarms/events

Data block tables

Functional objects

Fixed objects

Functional objects

Tables

ON/OFF buttons

Word buttons

Command buttons

Bit lamps

Word lamps

Numeral display & input

String display & input

Thumbwheel switches

Temporary input

Text

List selections

Level meters

Bitmaps

Analogue meters

Broken-line graphs

Data log graphs

Video display

Dates

Times

Alarm/event displays

Alarm/event summaries and histories

1-1

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

User Screen

Fixed graphic

Frame

Functional object

Table

Functional object

Functional object

Overlaid

Sheet

1-1 The NS-Designer

Sheet objects

Windows

Product Components

The following software and data are included with the NS-NSDC1-V @ .

NS-Designer Software

Transfer Program

Tool for transferring systems, projects, screens, and settings files.

Memory Card Transfer Tool

Tool for exchanging data with the Memory Card mounted to the PT.

NT631C Conversion Support Tool

CX-Server

PT System Program (replacement program)

Operation Manuals

The operation manuals include an

NS-series Macro Reference

, an

NS-Series Tutorial Manual

, and a

Host Connection Manual

.

Sample Data

Sample data of the screens created in the NS-series tutorial is included.

Switch Box Utility

Tool for helping to debug the operation of PLCs.

SAP (Smart Active Parts) Data

Libraries containing setting/monitor screens (e.g., for Position Control Units and Temperature Controllers).

1-2

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-2 System Requirements

1-2 System Requirements

The following are required to use the NS-Designer.

1-2-1 Hardware

Recommended Processor

Intel Celeron 400 MHz or better required.

Computer

IBM PC/AT or compatible capable of running the required OS.

Recommended Memory

64 Mbytes or more required. (Be sure to provide sufficient capacity, observing the recommend values for the OS.)

Available Disk Space

200 Mbytes or more recommended.

CD-ROM Drive

Required to install the NS-Designer.

Monitor

VGA monitor required for DOS computers. A resolution of 800 x 600 pixels or higher is recommended.

If the display resolution in the Windows screen properties is set to a lower setting, such as 640 x 480 pixels, portions of the NS-Designer windows may not be displayed. If this happens, increase the resolution. If large display fonts are used, not all of the text may fit in dialog boxes, preventing correct display. If this happens, use the small display fonts.

Mouse

A mouse supported by the OS must be used.

Operating System

Any of the following operating systems can be used: Microsoft Windows 95, Microsoft Windows 98,

Microsoft Windows Me, or Microsoft Windows NT (version 4.0, service pack 6a or higher), Microsoft

Windows 2000 (service pack 3 or higher), or Microsoft XP.

Microsoft Windows 3.1 is not supported.

Internet Explorer version 5.5 or higher is required.

1-2-2 Equipment Required to Transfer Screen Data

RS-232C connection cable

Ethernet cable

Memory Cards

Refer to

Appendix 7 Connecting Cable Specifications

for cable specifications.

1-3

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions

1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions

1-3-1 Project Overview

A project contains all of the objects and settings required for a group of user screens.

The project name is specified to access data when editing on the NS-Designer or transferring data to

PT.

System setting for

PT operation

User screens

Password setting

Unit and scale setting

Library objects

Data log setting

Alarm/event setting

A wide variety of objects can be used as required to create screens.

Some of the objects that can be used are described below.

Fixed Objects

Fixed objects, which do not provide any input functions, can be created on a screen.

Although fixed objects can be set to flicker, they are otherwise displayed on the screen in a constant state.

Functional Objects

Functional objects can be used to communicate with internal memory in the PT or with a PLC. Functional objects have both graphic and operational properties. The display of functional objects can be changed according to the status of the PT or PLC, and they can be used to input data through operations from the PT.

Table

A table object provides multiple functional objects in a single table format.

Frame

A frame object enables the creation of areas on a screen so that only part of the screen can be switched to another page. Frames consist of more than one page, and the displayed contents of the functional objects configuring each page can be switched based on PT or PLC status. Frames can contain fixed objects, functional objects, and tables.

Background

A background is a graphic screen that is displayed as the background of other screens.

Bitmap files and JPEG files can be displayed as backgrounds.

Registering Created Objects

Created objects can be registered in a library so that they can be easily reused at many different locations or on different screens.

The following objects can be registered in the library.

Fixed objects, functional objects, tables, and frames

1-4

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions

1-3-2 Manipulating Data on the PLC

Data can be input to and output from a PLC using the following objects, enabling values in memory to be set or the screen data to be updated according to changes in memory.

Input

PT PLC

Output

Object Input Output

ON/OFF Button OK OK

Word Button

Command Button

Switch Screen

Key Button

OK



OK

Indirect Specification of Screens

OK

Indirect Specification of Character

Strings to Send

OK



OK

(Writing Screen Page Numbers)



Bit Lamp

Word Lamp

Numeral Display & Input

OK

OK

OK





OK

String Display & Input

Thumbwheel Switch

OK

OK

OK

OK

List Selection

Level Meter

Analogue Meter

Video Display

Broken-line Graph

Data Log Graph

Date/Time

Alarm/Event Display

Alarm/Event Summary & History

Data Block Table

Frames

Temporary input

(Indirect Reference of Display

Strings)

OK

(Address for specifying the File

Lines)

OK

(Indirect Specification of Display

Data)

OK



OK

(Specifying Display Update Bits)

(Specifying Number of Display Refreshes)

(Broken-line Monitor Address)

OK

(Monitor Address)

(Log Timing)

(Scale for Time Axis)

(Address for updating Display)



OK

OK

OK

OK



OK

(Writing Selected Line Number)

(Writing Selected Character Strings)









OK





(Writing Alarm Ids)

OK







1-5

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions

1-3-3 PT Memory

PT memory is made up of internal memory and system memory.

Internal Memory

The internal memory contained in the PT can be read and written by the user. Internal memory can be allocated as required for settings, such as the communications addresses of functional objects.

The internal memory is divided into two sections.

Memory Contents

$HB

$HW

Bit memory is used for I/O flags and signal information.

Up to 32 Kbits (32,768 bits) can be used.

Word memory is used to store numeral and character string data.

Each word contains 16 bits, but consecutive words can be used as required for character strings and 32-bit data.

Up to 32 Kwords (32,768 words) can be used.

Holding Bit Memory

Holding bit memory is used for I/O flags and signal information.

Up to 8 Kbits (8,192 bits) of data can be held in this area even if the PT power is turned OFF.

Holding Word Memory

Holding word memory is used to save numerical values and character-string data.

Each word consists of 16 bits, but consecutive words can be used as required for character strings with a user-defined length and 32-bit data.

Up to 8 Kwords (8,192 words) of data can be held in this area even if the PT power is turned OFF.

System Memory

System memory is used to change information between the host and the PT, such as controlling the

PT and notifying the host of PT status.

The system memory is divided into two sections.

$SB

$SW

Memory Contents

System Bit Memory

The system bit memory contains 52 bits with predefined functions.

System Word Memory

The system word memory contains 38 words with predefined functions.

1-6

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions

PLC words and bits can be allocated as communications addresses for functional objects and other objects. To enable this, a name is registered for each PLC. This setting is called the host registration.

Refer to

1-3 Communicating with the Host

in the

NS series Programming Manual

for details on the host.

Communicates with address

10000 in host B

Communicates with address

10000 in host C

Communicates with address 10000 in host A

HOST A HOST B

HOST C

1-3-5 Screen Types and Applications

The following screens can be displayed on the PT: User screens with objects configured as required by the user, sheets, and system screens with predefined functions.

Screen type

User Screen

Base Screen

Pop-up Screen

Sheet

System Menu

Contents

Used to create normal screens.

Basic screens displayed during PT operation.

Pop-up screens can be displayed overlapping other screens.

Up to 3 pop-up screens can be displayed at the same time.

Sheets are screens used when the same images are to be displayed on more than one screen. They are used together with other screens, such as base screens and pop-up screens.

Up to 10 sheets can be created in each project.

The System Menu Screen is predefined and cannot be changed by the user. It is used to set or confirm various special functions of the PT, such as to initialize data or to access various histories.

1-7

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions

1-3-6 Object Types

Some details on the types of object that can be positioned on a screen are described below.

Fixed Objects

The following fixed objects can be used.

Rectangle

Circle/Oval

Straight Line or Arrow

Polyline

Polygon

Sector

Arc

1-8

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions

Functional Objects

The following functional objects can be used.

Icon Name

ON/OFF Button

Contents

Control the ON/OFF status of the specified write address. Any of four action types can be selected.

Word Button

Command Button

Set numeric data at the specified address. Values can also be increased and decreased.

Perform special processing, such as switching screens, controlling pop-up screens, controlling video, etc.

Bit Lamp

Word Lamp

Text

Turn ON and OFF according to the ON/OFF status of the specified address.

Light in 10 steps according to the value in the specified address (0 to

9).

Display the registered character string.

Numeral Display & Input

String Display & Input

List Selection

Numerically display the word data from the specified address and input data from a tenkey pad.

Display the character string from the word data from the specified address and input data from a keyboard.

Display the registered characters string in a list for selection.

Thumbwheel Switch

Analogue Meter

Level Meter

Broken-line Graph

Numerically display the word data from the specified address and increment and decrement the data when increment/decrement buttons are pressed.

Display graphs in three colors in circles, semi-circles or quarter circles for the word data at the specified address.

Display levels in three colors for the word data at the specified address.

Display a broken-line graph for the word data at the specified address.

Video Display

Alarm/Event Display

Alarm/Event Summary and History

Date

Time

Data Log Graph

Data Block Table

Temporary Input

Display images from video cameras and Vision Sensors.

Display alarms or events that have occurred in order of priority.

Display summaries or histories of alarms or events that have occurred.

Display and set date.

Display and set time.

Display trend graphs for the word data at specified addresses.

Writes to and reads from PLC preset recipe data, such as instructions for manufacturing process.

Display numerical values and character strings that have been input during creation of a tenkey or keyboard for Numeral Display & Input and String Display & Input objects using command buttons.

1-9

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions

1-3-7 Functions Used to Create Screens

The following functions can be conveniently used to make screens more effective.

Creating Tables

Functional objects of the same type can be created as a group in a table.

Functional objects can be easily created and organized in a table simply by specifying the type of functional object, the number of rows, and the number of columns. Item names (text) can also be added to the cells of the table.

The properties of the functional objects can be set as a group, and addresses can be automatically allocated by setting offsets.

Refer to

Creating Tables

under

5-1 Creating Functional Objects

for more information.

Item names are created with Text objects

Functional objects: Numeral Display & Input objects

Number of horizontal items: 4

Number of vertical items: 3

Address, such as $W100,

$W101, $W102, etc., are allocated.

Common properties for all the

Numeral Display & Input objects are set at the same time.

Creating Frames

A frame object enables the creation of areas on a screen so that only part of the screen can be switched to another page. Frames consist of more than one page, and the displayed contents of the functional objects configuring each page can be switched using the page switching function of the frame. A frame can contain up to 256 frame pages, and objects can be pasted as required within each frame page.

Refer to

4-4 Frames

for details.

Groups

More than one functional object or fixed object can be defined as a group.

The group, which contains more than one functional or fixed object, can be rotated, flipped, or sized as if it were just one object.

Grouped objects can also be created with other functional or fixed objects or placed in other groups.

Refer to

Grouping and Ungrouping Objects

under

5-5 Layout Functions

for more information.

Object Library

An object and all of its property settings can be registered as one object. Created objects registered in a library can be easily reused at many different locations or on different screens. Refer to

5-13 Library

Registration and Sharing Objects

for details.

Smart Active Parts

Setting and monitor screens (such as setting screens for Position Control Units and Temperature Controllers) are pre-installed as standard library objects for the NS-Designer. For details, refer to

How to use Smart Active Parts

(PDF) included with the NS-Designer.

1-10

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions

Selecting Fixed Objects for Buttons and Lamps

Specified fixed objects can be displayed for ON/OFF buttons, word buttons, bit lamps, and word lamps to create more graphic displays.

Object selected.

Object selected.

Drawing Fixed Objects

Fixed objects, which do not provide any functions themselves, can be drawn on a screen. The following fixed objects can be drawn. Rectangles, circles, ovals, straight lines, polylines, polygons, sectors, and arcs

Creating Backgrounds

General-purpose image data can be used as backgrounds for user screens. The following file types can be used.

Bitmap files (.BMP)

JPEG files (.JPG)

Switching Displays

Displays can be switched to check the operation of screens created offline.

The following switching functions can be used.

Switching Screens

Switching Frame Pages

Edited frame pages can be switched forward and backward.

Refer to

Switching Frame Pages

under

4-4 Frames

for details.

Switching Screens

Edited screens can be switched forward and backward.

Refer to

Switching Screens

under

4-1 Basic Operations

for details.

Zooming

Screens can be zoomed in and out.

Refer to

Zoom

under

4-1 Basic Operations

for details.

Switching Object Displays

ID Displays

Object ID numbers can be displayed.

Refer to

Switching Items Displayed for Objects

under

4-1 Basic Operations

for details.

Error Object Displays

Objects for which errors were detected in validating are displayed with red borders.

Refer to

Show ID

under

4-1 Basic Operations

for details.

1-11

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions

Displaying Sheet Objects

The sheet objects overlapped on base screens can be displayed.

Refer to

Show Sheet Object

under

Switching Items Displayed for Objects

under

4-1 Basic Operations

for details.

Sheet Objects Hidden Sheet Objects Displayed

Displaying Switch Labels

The specified switch labels can be displayed.

Refer to

Switch Label

under

4-1 Basic Operations

for details.

Simulating ON/OFF Status

The functional objects can be displayed in their ON status.

Refer to

Displaying ON Status

under

Switching Items Displayed for Objects

under

4-1 Basic Operations

for details.

ON Status OFF Status

Displaying Addresses

The communications addresses set for each functional object can be displayed. Refer to

Show Address

under

Switching Items Displayed for Objects

under

4-1 Basic Operations

for details.

Address Display

1-12

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions

The stored data for specified addresses is displayed as a graph.

Up to 100 groups can be registered for each project. Up to 16 addresses can be registered for each group.

Up to 50 addresses can be registered for constant logging.

1-3-9 Alarms/Events

Addresses can be registered for alarm monitoring to provide notification for alarms from the specified addresses. Registration can also be used to display events, such as operation startup.

Alarm-related functional objects can be used to display alarms and events that have occurred or to display alarm/event histories.

Alarm 1

Alarm 2

Alarm 500

Up to 5,000 alarms can be registered.

Simple Display

List

1-13

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions

1-3-10 Data Blocks

Data blocks (recipes) enable reading/writing numeric values and character strings from/to memory areas, such as those in a PLC. Data blocks can be used to easily change the arrangement of the system.

Create the data in CSV files and store them in the PT beforehand. The created data can be used to make changes while operating the PT.

Examples: Setting the width (numeric value), height (numeric values), and color (character string) in the PLC (Refer to the figure shown below.)

Set width: 150, height: 54, and color: blue for product B.

Just by selecting product B, these three items can be set for the PLC. If product A is selected, a width of 100, height setting of 52, and a color setting of red will be set for the PLC.

Processing conditions for product B

(150, 54, blue) set in PLC

To controlled devices

Data block

Width

Product A

B

Height

Color

Red

Blue

Product

Yellow

Produ

Produ

Conditions for product B are selected and set in PLC.

Red

Blue

Product

B

Using data block, the user does not need to save the data in the PLC beforehand, so that memory of the PLC can be saved and ladder program can be reduced. Data blocks also have the following features.

Data in CSV format can be edited and managed on a personal computer.

Data can be edited on the PT.

Data can be written to a Memory Card.

Data can be read from a Memory Card.

Processes values and character strings can be handled.

Maximum number of rows: 1,000. Maximum number of columns: 500. Data blocks with both 1,000 rows and 500 columns, however, cannot be set.

Refer to

2-16 Data Blocks - Restrictions for Data Blocks

in the

Programming Manual

for details.

1-14

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions

1-3-11 Video Display

Install a Video Input Unit (NS-CA001) on the PT to display the picture output from video devices such as a video camera or Vision Sensor on the PT. Up to four video devices can be connected to the PT.

There are two input methods: NTSC and PAL.

1

3

2

4

NTSC/PAL

4 ch

3 ch

2 ch

1 ch

1

2

3

4

Video camera or

Vision Sensor

1-15

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-3 Basic Configuration and Functions

1-3-12 Importing and Exporting CSV Files

The property settings of functional objects can be edited as CSV files.

Export property settings to CSV files, edit them with a standard spreadsheet program or other editing tool, and then import them back into the NS-Designer to set the properties of functional objects.

Refer to

Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files

for details.

Editing in spreadsheet software

Importing

1-3-13 Validating

Functional object settings are checked according to validation items to see if any mistakes have been made.

Any errors that are detected are displayed in a list. The functional or fixed objects where errors exist can also be displayed.

Refer to

Section 9 Validation

for details.

1-16

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-4 Outline of Operational Flow

Screen data is created with the NS-Designer as follows:

Start NS-Designer.

Select PT model.

Open screen.

Make system settings.

Select in dialog box.

A screen is automatically opened when a new project is created.

Otherwise screens are opened with

File - Open Screen

Settings - System Setting

1-4 Outline of Operational Flow

Set project properties.

Set screen properties.

Settings - Project Properties

Settings - Screen Properties

Register host.

Lay out objects.

Save screen data.

Save project.

Check project by printing data.

Check object operation with test tool.

Transfer data to PT.

Settings - Register Host

File - Save Screen

File - Save Project

File - Print

Tools - Test

File – Transfer Data

Note

Start actual operation only after sufficiently checking the operation of the screen data and host programming.

1-17

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-5 Menu Commands

1-5 Menu Commands

The commands that appear on the pull-down menus of the NS-Designer and their functions are described in the following tables.

File Menu

Command

New Project

Open Project

Save Project

Save Project As

Template

Project Maintenance

New Screen

Open Screen

Close Screen

Save Screen

Save All

Open Sheet

Apply Sheet

Import CSV File

Export CSV File

Transfer Data

Print

Recent Projects

Exit

Function

Creates a new project.

Opens an existing project.

Saves the current project (overwrites the existing file).

Saves the current project under a specified name.

Specifies a template project.

Copies, deletes, backs up, and restores projects.

Creates a new screen under the current project.

Opens an existing screen in the current project.

Closes the screen currently being edited.

Saves the current screen.

Saves (overwrites) all of the data for the current project.

Creates new sheet or edits a sheet.

Sets a screen with overlapping sheets.

Imports project or screen data saved in CSV format to the current project or screen.

Exports the current project or screen data to a file in CSV format.

Downloads screen data created on the NS-Designer to the PT or uploads screen data from the PT to the NS-Designer.

Outputs current project or screen information to a printer or to a file. Select

Print

to display a preview.

Displays a list of currently edited projects. (Up to four projects are displayed.)

Ends the NS-Designer.

Edit Menu

Command

Undo

Redo

Cut

Copy

Paste

Offset Paste

Delete

Find

Replace

Select All

Repeat

Function

Discards changes and restores the previous status.

Restores the changes discarded with

Undo.

Deletes the selected objects and places them in the internal buffer.

Copies the selected objects and places them in the internal buffer.

Pastes objects that have been cut or copied.

Pastes objects that have been cut or copies with offset addresses.

Deletes the selected objects.

Searches for functional objects using addresses or character strings as keywords.

Replaces addresses set for functional objects.

Selects all objects on a screen or all functional or fixed objects of a specific type.

Copies the specified object the specified number of times horizontally or vertically.

1-18

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

View Menu

Command

Toolbars

Status Bar

Switch Label

Previous Screen

Next Screen

Previous Frame Page

Next Frame Page

Simulate ON/OFF

Show ID

Show Address

Show Error Object

Show Sheet Object

Show Touch Points

Zoom

Refresh

1-5 Menu Commands

Function

Displays and hides the toolbars.

(Standard, functional object, fixed object, operation, formatting, color, and address settings)

Displays and hides the status bar.

Switches to the specified label display.

Displays the previous screen.

Displays the next screen.

Displays the previous frame page.

Displays the next frame page.

Switches functional objects between ON and OFF status displays.

Displays and hides ID numbers for objects.

Displays and hides address displays for functional objects.

Displays and hides error marks for objects.

Switches the display of objects registered in sheets.

Displays the touch points on the PT.

Zooms the display in and out.

Redraws the screen.

Functional Objects Menu

Command

ON/OFF Button

Function

Starts creation of an ON/OFF button.

Word Button

Command Button

Bit Lamp

Word Lamp

Text

Numeral Display & Input

String Display & Input

List Selection

Thumbwheel Switch

Analogue Meter

Level Meter

Broken-line Graph

Bitmap

Alarm/Event Display

Alarm/Event Summary &

History

Date

Time

Data Log Graph

Data Block Table

Video Display

Frame

Table

Temporary Input

Starts creation of a word button.

Starts creation of a command button.

Starts creation of a bit lamp.

Starts creation of a word lamp.

Starts creation of text.

Starts creation of a number display and input object.

Starts creation of a string display and input object.

Starts creation of a list selection object.

Starts creation of a thumbwheel switch.

Starts creation of an analogue meter.

Starts creation of a level meter.

Starts creation of a broken-line graph.

Starts creation of a bitmap.

Starts creation of an alarm/event display object.

Starts creation of an alarm/event summary & history.

Starts creation of a data object.

Starts creation of a time lamp.

Starts creation of a data log graph.

Starts creation of a data block table.

Starts creation of a video display.

Starts creation of a frame region.

Starts creation of a table on a table creation screen.

Starts creation of a temporary input.

1-19

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-5 Menu Commands

Fixed Objects Menu

Command

Rectangle

Circle/Oval

Straight line

Polyline

Polygon

Sector

Arc

Settings Menu

Command

Object Properties

Edit Label

Function

Starts creation of a rectangle.

Starts creation of a circle or oval.

Starts creation of a straight line.

Starts creation of a continuous straight line.

Starts creation of a polygon.

Starts creation of a pie-shaped sector.

Starts creation of an arc.

Change Settings at Once

Flicker Setting

Password Setting

Unit/Scale Setting

Alarm/Event Setting

Data Log Setting

Data Block Setting

Change Input Order

Project Properties

Screen Properties

System Setting

Reset Defined Default

Change PT Model

Register Host

Function

Sets the properties of the selected functional object.

Enables direct editing of labels on the screen without opening a property dialog box.

Enables editing the basic properties of the selected functional objects in a table.

Functional objects can be added and deleted as well.

Sets the flicker operation parameters.

Sets the password.

Displays the unit and scale conversions for a numeral display.

Set the alarm function (addresses, messages, etc.).

Set the data log function (e.g., data log groups).

Performs registration and correction of data blocks.

Sets the order for shifting the focus for objects that can be input.

Sets the project properties.

Sets the screen properties.

Sets the PT operating parameters.

Resets all of the settings made for an object. (Functional and fixed objects)

Sets the model of the NS-series PT.

Registers the host.

Layout Menu

Command

Align/ Distribution

Make Same Size

Function

Aligns the position of more than one selected object. (Left, Center in a Column,

Right, Top, Center in a Row, Bottom, Distribute Horizontally, or Distribute Vertically)

Sizes all selected objects horizontally and vertically to the same size as that of the largest or smallest object.

Moves the selected object to the front or back.

Moves the selected object one bit or one grid unit up, down, right, or left.

Rotates or flips an object. (90 Degrees Clockwise, 90 Degrees Counterclockwise,

Flip Vertical, Flip Horizontal, Rotate Right 90 Degrees Around Center of

Screen/Frame, Rotate Left 90 Degrees Around Center of Screen/Frame, Flip

Horizontal Around Center of Screen/Frame, or Flip Vertical Around Center of

Screen/Frame)

Edits the shape of a fixed object. (Edits, adds, or deletes nodes.)

Groups objects.

Ungroups a group of objects.

Sets the grid.

Order

Nudge

Rotate/Flip

Modify

Group

Ungroup

Grid

1-20

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-6 Functions Added in Version 3.0

Tools Menu

Command

Screen Maintenance

Sheet Maintenance

Validation

Validation Result

Functional Object List

List Up Functional Objects

Used

List Up Addresses Used

Address Cross Reference

Edit Background Bitmap

Register Library

Use Library

Test

Resource Report

Options

Function

Changes the titles of, copies, deletes, or replaces screen page numbers for screens in a project.

Changes the titles of, copies, deletes, or replaces sheet page numbers for sheets in a project.

Performs an error check on object settings.

Displays the results of validation.

Displays a list of functional objects on screen with property settings.

Displays the number of times functional objects are used in screens, screen pages that are not used, and frame pages in a tree format.

Displays a list of addresses that are used.

Displays a list of functional object IDs when addresses are used.

Edits the background.

Registers functional objects in the library and performs maintenance.

Paste functional objects registered in the library.

Performs operating test on the computer without connecting to a PLC.

Displays a report on the resources that have been used.

Sets optional functions.

Window Menu

Command

Cascade

Tile

Arrange Icons

Function

Cascades the screen editing windows.

Tiles the screen editing windows.

Arranges the minimized window icons.

Help Menu

Command

Contents

Search for Help on

How to Use Help

About NT631

Conversion Support Tool

Function

Displays the contents for the online help.

Displays a search dialog box for help topics.

Displays information on using Help.

Displays information on the version of NS-Designer.

1-6 Functions Added in Version 3.0

The NS-Designer Version 3.0 is supplemented and enhanced by the following functions.

Supplement/

Enhancement

Screen data transfer through PLCs

Switch Box Screen

Multiple language support

Function

Enables transferring screen data to NS Hardware through a PLC and transferring ladder program to the PLC through the NS Hardware.

Displays I/O status of addresses on the NS Hardware. Addresses and their comments can be reused from a ladder program using the Switch Box Utility.

Multiple languages (Simplified Chinese, Korean, Traditional Chinese, etc.) can be displayed on user screens.

Enables performing video captures using system memory ($SW24) as a trigger. Video capture using a PLC trigger

Enhanced parts List

Reading CLK status

Macro to set time

Screen data can be transferred using Ethernet directly the first time

Vastly increased library objects for use as buttons and lamps.

Displays status of CLK Board attached with NS Hardware on the screen.

Automatically sets the time, which as set manually before.

Screen data can be transferred using Ethernet directly the first time.

1-21

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-7 Functions Added in Version 4.0

1-7 Functions Added in Version 4.0

The NS-Designer Version 4.0 is supplemented and enhanced by the following functions.

Supplement/

Enhancement

Equipped with USB port as a standard feature.

Function

Equipped with a USB port as a standard feature enabling display contents to be printed using USB-compatible general-purpose color printers (e.g., Canon or

Epson printers).

BMP and JPEG images can now be displayed using up to 32,000 colors. Display possible in up to

32,000 colors.

Screen data capacity greatly increased.

High-speed drawing

The data capacity has increased from 4 Mbytes to 20Mbytes.

The drawing speed is twice that of existing OMRON products.

1-8 Functions Added in Version 5.0

The NS-Designer Version 5.0 is supplemented and enhanced by the following functions.

Supplement/

Enhancement

NS5-series models added.

Object forms can be selected by user.

Windows fonts can be used in Button and Lamp objects.

Continuous input can be received from Bar Code

Reader.

Ver. 1.X projects can be created and edited.

Function

Added NS5-SQ0 (B) -V1 with compact 5.7-inch STN color display.

The forms of ON/OFF Button, Word Button, Bit Lamp, and Word Lamp objects can now be specified as BMP or JPEG image files.

The labels used in ON/OFF Button, Word Button, Bit Lamp, Word Lamp, and

Command Button objects can now be specified using Windows fonts.

Input order of numeric values and character strings can now be controlled, allowing continuous input from a bar code reader.

NS-Designer Ver. 5.0 can be used to create and edit projects for NS System Ver.

1.X.

1-9 Functions Added in Version 6.0

The NS-Designer Version 6.0 is supplemented and enhanced by the following functions.

Supplement/

Enhancement

A PT model added.

Transfer program functions added.

Data log function expanded.

Video captures can be read from the memory card.

Appearance of command buttons can be specified.

Function

Added NS8-TV1 (B)-V1.

Screen data can be transferred from a personal computer to the PT via modem.

Installing a CLK board in the personal computer enables screen data to be transferred. CX-Server compatibility has also simplified settings required for data transfer.

The number of always logging points has been increased from 5,000 to 50,000 points, and logging data can be automatically saved to the memory card. Saved

CSV files can be read and displayed overlapping the log graph with a reference.

Image data saved in the memory card can be specified from a list and displayed.

The list can be called using the command buttons or from the system menu.

Temporary input object added.

The storage format of numeric values in system memory can be selected.

The appearance of command buttons can be specified as round buttons. BMP and JPEG image files can be specified for button appearance. Write confirmation messages can also be set.

Objects for temporarily displaying input numerical values or character strings are provided for use when creating tenkeys or keyboards for Numerical Display &

Input and String Display & Input objects using command buttons. Temporary input objects can also be used to display maximum and minimum values.

The numerical value storage format for system memory can be selected from

BCD and binary.

1-22

Section 1 Overview

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1-10 Functions Added in Version 6.2

Supplement/

Enhancement

The data format for specifying line numbers in indirectly specified files for functional objects can be selected.

The number of alarms has been increased.

Macros FOR, NEXT,

CONTINUE, and BREAK have been added.

Label application function for importing CSV files has been added.

System memory functions have been added.

Function

The data format for specifying line numbers in indirectly specified files set using functional object properties can be selected from BCD and binary.

The maximum number of alarms that can be registered has been increased to

5,000.

Loop processing can be performed using macros. This improves efficiency of macro creation.

When importing CSV files, the character properties for a specified label name can be applied to the character properties for another label. This function is useful when setting multiple labels.

The following flags have been added:

PT battery low flag

PT memory card free space check flag

Memory card power OFF bit

Memory card removing status

Video capture start bit

Video capture executing flag

Video capture results flag

Periodical Data Log Save in process flag

Print screen/video capture switching bit

1-10 Functions Added in Version 6.2

The NS-Designer Version 6.2 is supplemented and enhanced by the following main functions.

Supplement/

Enhancement

PT models added

Project trigger macro added

Data block control functions added to command buttons

Added items to system memory

Function

Added NS5-SQ0 -V2, NS5-TQ0 -V2, and NS5-MQ0 -V2.

Setting the macro to execute when the bit or value at a specified address changes has been enabled.

Data block control functions have been added to command buttons to enable reading/writing between CSV files and PLC memory, CVS files and PT memory, and PT memory and PLC memory when a button is pressed or a specified address turns ON while the command button is displayed.

The following have been added to system memory: data block control complete flag, internal holding bit/word memory ($HB/$HW) initialization flag, and data block error number.

Added arrows

Expanded Alarm/Event

Summary & History

Added program transfer function

Added installation method

Added startup method

Arrow heads can be added to the start and/or end of straight lines.

The titles of each display item can now be displayed on the top line. Also, alarm messages that are not completely displayed can be touched to display them in a message box.

Screen data transfer to the PT from a personal computer has been enabled using a USB cable.

NS-Designer can be installed from the CX-One FA Integrated Tool Package.

Startup has been enabled by right-clicking the NS-series PT in the CX-Integrator

Network Configuration Window and selecting

Start Special Application

. If

Start with Settings Inherited

is selected, startup through to new project creation will be automatically executed.

1-23

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

The NS-Designer software must be installed in the computer when using the NS-Designer for the first time.

The NS-Designer is application software designed to be operated on Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, Me, 2000, or

XP.

Use the following procedure to install, start, and exit the NS-Designer when Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, Me,

2000, or XP is already installed in the computer.

2-1 Before Installing the NS-Designer ...............................................................................................................2-1

2-2 Installing the NS-Designer...........................................................................................................................2-2

2-3 Starting the NS-Designer ...........................................................................................................................2-14

2-4 Exiting the NS-Designer ............................................................................................................................2-15

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2-1 Before Installing the NS-Designer

2-1 Before Installing the NS-Designer

Before installing the NS-Designer, check that the following requirements have been met. g

Monitor

VGA monitor or better.

Resolution of 800 x 600 pixels or higher is recommended for optimum use of NS-

Designer.

g

CD-ROM Drive

Required to install the

NS-Designer.

g

Mouse

A mouse that supports

Microsoft Windows.

g

Computer

IBM PC/AT or compatible with Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT 4.0 (SP6a or higher), Me, 2000 (SP3 or higher), or XP installed

System Requirements

CPU

Recommended memory

Hard disk

Internet Explorer

Intel Celeron 400 MHz or better

64 Mbytes or more

200 Mbytes or more available disk space

Version 5.5 or higher

2-1

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2-2 Installing the NS-Designer

2-2 Installing the NS-Designer

Install the NS-Designer in the hard disk.

To install the NS-Designer, execute the installation program provided.

For details on procedures for installing the NS-Designer from CX-One FA Integrated Tool Package, refer to the

CX-One Setup Manual

provided with CX-One.

Cat. No.

W444

Model

CXONE-AL @@ C-E

Manual name

CX-One Setup Manual

Contents

Installation and overview of CX-One FA

Integrated Tool Package.

Reference

If the NS-Designer was previously installed from the CX-One and it’s necessary to install it from the individual NS-Designer CD-ROM, always uninstall the NS-Designer using the following procedure before installing it from its individual CD-ROM. The NS-Designer will not operate properly if it is installed without first uninstalling it.

1. Insert the CX-One installation disk 1 into the CD-ROM drive.

2. Select the Option to enable modifying the Support Software that is installed.

3. In the Select Features Dialog Box, clear the selection of only the NS-Designer. Do not change any other selections.

4. Continue by following the instructions in the dialog boxes to modify the installation and uninstall

NS-Designer.

5. Once the NS-Designer uninstallation process has been completed, place the individual CD-ROM disk for the NS-Designer into the CD-ROM drive and install the NS-Designer. (See note.)

Note: If the version of the CX-Server bundled on the individual NS-Designer CD-ROM is lower than the version of the CX-Server bundled with the CX-One, install only the NS-Designer and NOT the CX-Server. (A message will be displayed if the version is lower.) If a version of CX-Server that is lower than the version with the CX-One is installed, the CX-One will not operate properly.

2-2-1 Basic Installation Operations

The main buttons that are displayed during installation are as follows:

Confirms the settings in the window displayed and moves to the next window.

Cancels the settings in the window displayed and returns to the previous window.

Closes the window currently being displayed. The settings in the window are cancelled.

Installation can be cancelled by pressing this button in the installation window. A confirmation message will be displayed.

The actual folder configuration is displayed in a tree format, from which the folders where installation files are to be installed can be selected.

2-2

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2-2 Installing the NS-Designer

1. Start up Windows 95, 98, NT, Me, 2000, or XP.

2. Close all applications before executing installation. Place the NS-Designer CD-ROM in the

CD-ROM drive. The setup program is started automatically. If the setup program does not start automatically, such as after executing uninstall, locate Setup.exe in the CD-ROM using Windows

Explorer, and then double-click the file to execute the setup program.

Reference

If NS-Designer Ver. 2.X, 3.X, 4.X, 5.X, or 6.X is already installed, a dialog box to confirm deletion of this version will be displayed. Click the OK Button to start deleting this version. To exit the setup program, click the Cancel Button and then click the Exit Button.

FinsGateway and CX-Server will not be uninstalled by this operation.

3. The NS-Designer Setup Wizard will be displayed.

Install the NS-Designer by following the instructions in the Setup Wizard.

4. During installation, the installation progress is displayed as a percentage.

5. When NS-Designer installation has been completed, a message to confirm installation of Smart

Active Parts will be displayed. Click the

Yes

Button to start the installation. If Smart Active Parts installation is not required, click the

No

Button and proceed to step 10.

Smart Active Parts are libraries containing setting/monitoring screens (e.g., Position Control Unit setting screens and Temperature Controller monitoring screens).

6. The following dialog box will be displayed. Click the

Next

Button.

2-3

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting 2-2 Installing the NS-Designer

NS-Designer Operation Manual

7. The Setup Type Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the setup type and click the

Next

Button. If

Complete

is selected, proceed to step 9.

8. The dialog box for selecting features will be displayed. Select the Smart Active Parts to be installed and click the

Next

Button.

9. During installation, the installation progress is displayed as a percentage. When installation has been completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the

Finish

Button.

10. A message will be displayed to confirm installation of the CX-Server. Click the

Yes

Button.

11. The following screen for installing the CX-Server will be displayed.

2-4

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2-2 Installing the NS-Designer

12. Click the

Next

Button. The screen for specifying the installation destination will be displayed.

13. Click the

Next

Button. If the following message is displayed, click the

OK

Button to continue installation.

CX-Server installation followed by installation of CX-Server Driver management tools will begin, and the installation program will automatically copy the CX-Server and CX-Server Driver management tools files to the specified directory.

14. When installation has been completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Select whether or not to restart the computer immediately, and click the

Finish

Button to complete the installation.

Always restart the computer before using NS-Designer.

Reference

When installing NS-Designer in Windows NT, 2000, or XP, log onto the computer as the administrator to ensure that system DLL files can be overwritten. If overwriting system DLL files fails,

NS-Designer may not operate properly.

When adding Smart Active Parts after installation of NS-Designer, double-click the CD-ROM directory \SmartActiveParts\Setup.exe from Windows Explorer to execute the setup program. Select all the Smart Active Parts to be used in the dialog box for selecting components.

Refer to the

How to manage after conversion

file in the Programs Folder under the Windows Start

Menu for details after NT31C/NT631C Conversion Support Tool conversion.

Internet Explorer Ver 5.5 or higher is required to transfer data.

2-5

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2-2 Installing the NS-Designer

The folder structure after installation is as follows:

NS-Designer

bldparts

intaparts

BMP files

Manual

Sample Project Data

Tutorial

Macro

Operation

Setup

Programming

Smart Active Parts

RGB_Video (NS-CA002)

PartsLib

Smart Active Parts

Smart Active Parts Mini

runparts

System

NS12_V1

NS12

V3_x

NS10_V1

NS10

V3_x

NS8_V1

NS7

V3_x

NS5_V1_V2

RecoverUpdate_6_2

RecoverUpdate_3_x

NT631C_Cnv

Readme_E.txt

Parts Collection (bitmaps)

Directory containing manuals

Sample project data for tutorial

How to use Smart Active Parts

Host Connection Manuals (Temp. Controller and Memory Links/Host Links)

NS-CA002 RGB/Video Input Unit Manual

Smart Active Parts for NS8/NS10/NS12

Smart Active Parts for NS5

Ver. 3.x system program for NS12

Ver. 3.x system program for NS10

Ver. 3.x system program for NS7

Ver. 6.2 recovery/update program

Ver. 3 recovery/update program

Directory containing NT31C/NT613C Conversion Support Tool

Please read. (Contains precautionary information.)

2-6

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2-2 Installing the NS-Designer

2-2-3 Uninstalling

1. When uninstalling the NS-Designer or CX-Server, click the Windows

Start

Button and select

Settings - Control Panel

.

2. Double-click

Add/Remove Applications

.

2-7

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2-2 Installing the NS-Designer

3. Select NS-Designer or CX-Server from the displayed list of applications, and click the

Add/Remove

Button.

4. When the NS-Designer has finished being uninstalled, a message will be displayed indicating that the uninstall operation has been completed. Check the message and then click the

OK

Button.

2-8

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2-2 Installing the NS-Designer

2-2-4 Installing USB Drivers for NS-Series PTs.

Install the NS-series USB driver in the personal computer. After installation, data can be transferred between the personal computer and NS-series PT via USB.

Reference

With NS-V1 Series models, make sure that the PT has a lot number that supports USB transmission. The system program version of the NS-series PT must also support USB transmission. For details, refer

to 3-3-2 Connecting

via USB in the

NS series Setup Manual

(Cat. No. V083).

Compatible Personal Computers

Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP

Operation Procedure

Windows 2000 and Windows XP:

1. Start Windows 2000 or Windows XP.

2. Connect the personal computer to the NS-series PT USB slave connector using the USB cable.

The following Add New Hardware Wizard will be displayed. Click the

Next

Button.

3. The following dialog box will be displayed. Select

Search for the best driver for my device (Recommended)

.

Click the

Next

Button.

4. Select only and then click the

Next

Button.

2-9

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

the Button, and specify the following file.

NS-Designer installation directory

\USBHostDriver\Win2k_XP\Omron_NS.inf

2-2 Installing the NS-Designer

the Button to display the following dialog box. Click the

Next

Button to start installing the

USB driver.

7. When installation is completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the

Finish

Button.

2-10

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2-2 Installing the NS-Designer

Windows 98 and Windows Me:

1. Start Windows 98 or Windows Me.

2. Connect the personal computer to the NS-series PT USB slave connector using the USB cable.

The following Add New Hardware Wizard will be displayed. Click the

Next

Button.

3. The following dialog box will be displayed. Select

Search for the best driver for your device

(Recommended)

.

Click the

Next

Button.

4. Select only and then click the

Browse

Button and specify the following file.

NS-Designer installation directory

\USBHostDriver\Win98_Me\NS_DEV.inf the Button.

2-11

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2-2 Installing the NS-Designer

the Button to start installation.

When installation is completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the

Finish

Button.

7. The Add New Hardware Wizard will be displayed again. Click the

Next

Button.

8. The following dialog box will be displayed. Check that

Search for the best driver for your device

(Recommended)

is selected, and then click the

Next

Button.

9. Select only and then click the

Browse

Button and specify the following file.

NS-Designer installation directory

\USBHostDriver\Win98_Me\NS_COM.inf

10. Click the

Next

Button.

2-12

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2-2 Installing the NS-Designer

11. Click the

Next

Button to start installation.

When installation is completed, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the

Finish

Button.

2-13

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2-3 Starting the NS-Designer

2-3 Starting the NS-Designer

To start the NS-Designer, click the Windows

Start

Button, and then select

Programs - Omron –

CX-One - NS-Designer - NS-Designer Ver X

(The items displayed may vary according to the program folder specified during installation.), right-click the NS-series PT in the Network Configuration Window of CX-Integrator, and select

Start Special Application - Start Only

.

When the NS-Designer startup is completed, the Main Window will be displayed, as follows:

Reference

More than one copy of the NS-Designer application can be run at the same time.

To start NS-Designer, log in as the administrator when using a personal computer running Windows

NT, 2000, or XP.

2-14

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2-4 Exiting the NS-Designer

2-4 Exiting the NS-Designer

Use one of the following operations to exit the NS-Designer.

Select

Exit

from the File Menu.

Click the

Close

Button at the top right of the Main Window.

Double-click the NS-Designer icon at the top left of the Main Window.

Click the NS-Designer icon at the top left of the Main Window and select

Menu Box.

Press the

Alt + F4

Keys.

Close

from the Control

If the project data that is open has not been saved, a confirmation message will be displayed.

When the NS-Designer is exited, the system will return to the Windows screen.

2-15

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2-5 User Interface

2-5 User Interface

2-5-1 Basic Screen Functions

The configuration and names and functions of the components in the NS-Designer operation screen are described here.

Title bar

Menu bar

Toolbars

Screen being created

Status bar

Title Bar

The title bar displays the application name, project name, and screen number.

Menu Bar

Separates the functions into related groups.

Each group name is displayed in the menu bar and the functions are displayed in pull-down menus under each group name.

Toolbars

Standard Toolbar

This toolbar displays frequently used functions as icons.

Create

New

Project

Save

Project

Open

Screen

Cut Paste Redo

Open

Project

Create

New

Screen

Save

Screen

Copy Undo Zoom About

NS-Designer

2-16

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting 2-5 User Interface

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Functional Objects Toolbar

Displays screen creation functions for functional objects as icons. Select the icon button of the functional object to be used in creating the screen to start screen creation.

ON/OFF

Button

Word

Button

Command

Button

Bit

Lamp

Word

Lamp

Text

String Display

& Input

Numeral

Display &

Input

List

Selection

Thumbwheel

Switch

Level

Meter

Analogue

Meters

Broken-line

Graph

Bitmap

Alarm/Event

Summary &

History

Alarm/Event

Display

Date

Time

Data Block

Table

Data Log

Graph

Video Display

Temporary

Input

Frame

Table

Fixed Objects Toolbar

Displays fixed object drawing functions as icons. Select the icon button for the fixed object to be drawn and start drawing.

Rectangle

Straight

Polygon

Circle/Oval

Line

Polyline

Arc

Sector

Operations Toolbar

Displays frequently used functions from the View and Tools Menus as icons.

Show Error Object

Show ID

Bring to

Front

Previous

Screen

Previous

Previous

Frame Page

Label

Find

Validation

Result

List Up

Addresses

Used

Register

Library

Simulate

ON/OFF

Show Sheet

Object

Show Address

Send to

Back

Next Screen

Next Frame

Page

Next

Label

Functional

Object List

Address Cross

Reference

Use

Library

List Up Functional

Objects Used

2-17

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Colors Toolbar

Displays the color settings for functional objects and fixed objects as icons.

2-5 User Interface

Color 1

Copy/Paste Color 2

Color

Color 3 Color 4

The Copy/Paste Color Button can be used to copy the display color of a functional object or fixed object and paste it into another functional object or fixed object. Therefore, settings can be pasted in a batch without having to open a separate properties dialog box for every setting.

1. Select the functional object or fixed object with the color to be copied. the Button to copy the color and change the appearance of the cursor to the following.

3. Click over the functional object or fixed object where the color is to be pasted. The Paste

Color/Frame Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.

To paste colors to multiple functional objects or fixed objects, select the functional objects or fixed objects that are going to be edited by enclosing them with the cursor.

4. Select the items to be pasted and click the

Paste

Button.

Reference

The names of the items displayed as Color 1, Color 2, Color 3, and Color 4 in the Color Toolbar vary with the selected functional object and object settings.

Examples: Selecting rectangle, 2-light as the button type for ON/OFF Buttons.

Selecting circle/oval (fixed object).

2-18

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting 2-5 User Interface

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Font Properties Toolbar

This toolbar displays the font properties setting functions for text in functional objects as icons.

Copy/Paste

Font

Font

Font Size

Font Color

Bold

Italic

Align

Left

Align

Right

Center in a

Row

Center in a Column

Align

Top

Align

Bottom

The Copy/Paste Font Properties Button can be used to copy the text properties set for a functional object and paste them into another functional object. Therefore, settings can be pasted in a batch without having to open a separate properties dialog box for every setting.

1. Select the functional object with the text properties to be copied. the Button to change the appearance of the cursor to the following.

3. Click over the functional object where the text attributes are to be pasted. The Paste Text Attribute

Dialog Box will be displayed.

To paste text attributes to multiple functional objects, select the functional objects that are going to be edited by enclosing them with the cursor, as shown below.

4. Select the items to be pasted and click the

Paste

Button.

Reference

When raster fonts (font names: fine, standard, and rough) are selected, the bold and italic styles in the toolbar cannot be used.

Refer to

Text Attributes

under

2-8 Common Functional Object Functions

in the

NS Series Programming Manual

for details.

2-19

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2-5 User Interface

Address Toolbar

Displays the setting functions for the addresses of the functional objects in a toolbar. Select the functional object for which the address is to be set and set the address.

Using this toolbar, address settings can be edited and changed without having to open a properties dialog box for the settings.

Displays the set address.

Displays the address type.

When a functional object has multiple address settings, select the address type from the combo box and then set each address.

Clicking this button displays the

Address Setting Dialog Box from which the address can be set.

Selections for ON/OFF Buttons

Reference

Another method for setting addresses apart from directly inputting from the keyboard, is to input the address from the Address Settings Dialog Box that is displayed by clicking the Settings Button.

Refer to

5-7 Address Settings

for details.

Screen Creation Screens

These screens are used to create the screens displayed on the PT.

Status Bar

The status bar displays an explanation of the function or object where the cursor is positioned or which is selected.

Displays information on the function of the toolbar icon or menu item selected.

Displays the frame page number currently selected.

Displays the object name currently selected.

Displays the switch label name currently selected.

Displays the current coordinates of the cursor.

Displays the upper left coordinates of the object.

Displays the current zoom status.

Displays the selected NS-

Designer system i

Displays the PT model currently selected

2-20

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2-5 User Interface

Reference

The toolbars and status bar can be set to be shown or hidden.

Toolbar: Select

View - Toolbars

and then

Standard

,

Functional Object

,

Fixed Object

,

Operation

,

Formatting

,

Color

, or

Address

.

Status Bar: 1. Select

View

- Status Bar

.

A check symbol before an item indicates that the item is displayed.

The toolbars can be moved to any position on the screen.

Please the cursor on any part other than a button, and drag the toolbars to the desired location.

2-5-2 Dialog Box Main Functions

Dialog boxes are used to set detailed settings for executing PT functions.

Edit Box

Enter the character string. If there is a spin button , click the Up Arrow

Button to increase or decrease numerical values.

Option Buttons

Button or Down Arrow

Item names with a circle to their left are optional items.

From the multiple optional items, only one item can be selected. The selected item will be indicated by a black dot.

2-21

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Combo Box

2-5 User Interface

A list of multiple optional items will be displayed in a drop-down menu. Select the items to be set from the list.

List View

Select the item from the list.

Check Boxes

Item names with a square on their left side are the optional items.

Select whether or not to enable the item. The selected items are indicated with a check mark.

2-22

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

This section describes the basic operations for manipulating projects where data created for screens is stored.

3-1 Projects ........................................................................................................................................................3-1

3-2 Creating New Projects .................................................................................................................................3-2

3-3 Opening Existing Projects............................................................................................................................3-3

3-5 Saving a Project Under a Different Name....................................................................................................3-7

3-6 Opening Recent Projects..............................................................................................................................3-8

3-7 Opening Template Projects..........................................................................................................................3-9

3-10 Changing the PT Model .............................................................................................................................3-21

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-1 Projects

3-1 Projects

The NS-Designer designates and handles PT screen data as one project. A project consists of data that can be broadly divided into project folders where files such as bitmap files and project files (extension.ipp) are stored.

Sample pnlpg###.ipw(### = 000-F9F) pnlpg###.ipw(### = FFF-FF6) unitcom.txt

message.jpm

pnlalarm.alm

datalog.cfg

datalog.cfg

*.bmp*1, *.jpg*1

*.csv

*.ini*1

1, *.jpg*1

*.txt*1

*.lst*1

*.vec

print.cfg*2 errlist.txt*3

*.csv*2 log

*.log*2 sample.ipp

Screen file

Sheet file

Unit and scale setting file

Write confirmation message file

Alarm/event setting file

Data log setting file

Host setting file

Bitmaps and JPEG files for displaying background and bitmap objects

Data block data files

Communications conditions setting file

Text files for displaying text objects and indirectly specifying character strings

Text files for list selection object display and storing character strings

Figure specification graphic data files

Print setting files

Validation result files

Logging files

Internal logging files

Project files

Note 1. The user can edit these files with a text editor. The other files are created by NS-Designer and must not be edited using a text editor or other means. to the PT.

3.

These files are created when validating and are not transferred when transferring data to the PT.

When files are saved under the name Sample, a file named Sample.IPP will be created in a folder called Sample under \Temp\ in the NS-Designer install directory. To open an existing project, select the file with the IPP extension.

Reference

To move or copy the project data to a floppy disk or other storage area, select both the folder and project file, and execute the operation. The project consists of these two data types and cannot be opened if only one of them is selected.

3-1

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-2 Creating New Projects

3-2 Creating New Projects

The procedures for operations from creating new projects to opening screens are described here.

1. Select

File - New Project

or click the

New Project

Button in the toolbar.

Reference

Projects that were created with NS-Designer Ver. 2.0 or later cannot be run on PTs using system

Ver. 1.X. Install NS-Designer Ver. 1.X to create projects. Projects for system Ver. 1.X can be created or edited, however, when using NS-Designer Ver. 5.0 or later.

2. The New Project Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the NS-series PT model and System Version and click the

OK

Button.

Reference

The project system versions that can be run depend on the system program version installed in the

PT. Refer to

Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products

for details.

The NS-Designer can also be started by right-clicking the NS-series PT in the Network Configuration Window of the CX-Integrator and selecting

Start Special Application

-

Start with Settings Inherited

.

3. The New Screen Dialog Box will be displayed. Select

New Screen

or

Reuse Existing Screen

and click the

OK

Button. Refer to

Creating New Screens

under

4-2 Creating and Saving Screens

for details.

4. Screen creation starts after new screen is opened.

3-2

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-3 Opening Existing Projects

3-3 Opening Existing Projects

Opening From the File Menu

1. Select

File - Open Project

or click the

Open Project

Button in the toolbar.

2. The Select Project Dialog Box will be displayed.

Select the project file (IPP extension) and click the

Open

Button.

Opening by Double-clicking an IPP File

1. Double-click on an IPP file from Windows Explorer to display the Open Screen Dialog Box. the Button.

3-3

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-3 Opening Existing Projects

Reference

Screen data that was edited or saved with NS-Designer Ver. 2.X can be converted using the

NS-Designer’s Settings Menu. The procedure for converting to NS-Designer Ver. 6.X screen data is given below.

1. Open the NS-Designer Ver. 2.X data in NS-Designer Ver. 6.X.

2. Select

Settings – Conversion – Project – To Ver6.2

. This will convert the data to NS-Designer

Ver. 6.2 data.

Converting screen data for the NS7 to NS-Designer Ver. 6 or higher data will convert it as data for the NS8-TV1 @ -V1.

Depending on the combination of system program, NS-Designer version, and data version, it may not be possible to use converted data. Refer to

Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products

.

NS-Designer Ver. 5.0 or later can also convert screen data created with NS-Designer Ver. 1.X.

Reference

Project data created with NS-Designer from Ver. 1.X to Ver. 5.X can be edited and saved on

NS-Designer Ver. 6.X.

If project data that was edited or saved with NS-Designer Ver. 1.0 is opened with NS-Designer Ver.

6.X, the following data conversion confirmation message, which indicates making a copy of the data for Ver. 1.1 will be displayed.

If the

Yes

Button is clicked, the following dialog box will be displayed and the data will be resaved as Ver. 1.1 data under the specified project name.

If the

No

Button is clicked, the project will not be read or converted.

3-4

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-4 Saving Projects

The methods for saving project files are described here.

1. Select

File - Save Project

or click the

Save Project

Button in the toolbar.

3-4 Saving Projects

New Projects

Newly created projects and screens are temporarily created in a temporary directory until saved.

The temporary directory and temporary files are as follows:

(NS-Designer install directory)\TEMP\untitled.ipp

When a project or screen is saved for the first time, the following dialog box will be displayed and the project will be saved (copied from the TEMP directory). Specify the folder and file name where the project will be saved, and click the Save Button.

Always observe the following precautions when specifying the project name.

The project name must be no more than 42 characters including the IPP extension.

Select a name using alphanumerics, underscore (_), dollar symbols ($), and periods (.).

If the project name is specified using other characters, symbols, or marks, an error will occur when the

Save Button is clicked.

3-5

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-4 Saving Projects

Reference

♦ If a project is changed but has not yet been saved, a dialog box confirming whether or not to save the changes will be displayed when the project is closed.

When saving new projects, if the specified saving location contains an existing project, the existing project’s data will be deleted and overwritten with the new project data.

The setting for whether or not the screen is a pop-up screen is saved in the project file (*.IPP).

Therefore, even if the screen properties are set to pop-up screen, the screen will operate as a base screen when the PT is operating if the project has not been saved.

After changing the setting from base screen to pop-up screen, the relationship between whether the project or screen is saved and the operations at the PT is as follows:

Save project Save screen Operations at the PT

Yes Yes Operates as a pop-up screen.

Operates as a pop-up screen.

No Yes

Yes: Saves; No: Does not save saved screen.)

Operates as a base screen.

3-6

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-5 Saving a Project Under a Different Name

3-5 Saving a Project Under a Different Name

1. Select

File - Save Project As

.

2. The Save Project As Dialog Box will be displayed.

Specify the directory and file name where the project will be saved, and click the

Save

Button.

Always observe the following precautions when specifying the project name.

The project name must be no more than 42 characters including the IPP extension.

Select a name using alphanumerics, underscore (_), dollar symbols ($), and periods (.).

If the project name is specified using other characters, symbols, or marks, an error will occur when data is transferred to the PT.

Reference

When the project name is changed and saved, all the original project data will also be copied to the new project directory.

When specifying the project name, if the specified save destination has an existing project, the existing project’s data will be deleted and overwritten with the currently open project data.

3-7

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-6 Opening Recent Projects

3-6 Opening Recent Projects

Up to the four most recently used projects can be opened directly from a menu.

1. Select

File - Recent Projects

.

2. The recently used project names are displayed with the directory path.

Select any project from the list.

The four most recent projects are displayed beginning with the most recent

N o t t e

If a project edited or saved with NS-Designer Ver. 1.0 is opened with NS-Designer Ver. 6.2, the following message, confirming data conversion, will be displayed.

Refer to

3-3 Opening Existing Projects

for details.

3-8

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-7 Opening Template Projects

3-7 Opening Template Projects

By specifying a template project, screens that are saved in specific projects can always be reused when creating new screens. This is a useful, for example, for reusing screens from a particular project many times, or for collecting frequently used screens in a specific project and using them as a group screen format when creating projects. The workflow when specifying a template project is given in the following flowchart.

1. Specify the template project

2. Create a new screen.

3. Display Select Template

Dialog Box

Reusing screen from template project

4. (a) Select the screen to be reused.

Not reusing screen from template project

4. (b) Use standard screen creation procedures.

5. Edit and save screen.

3-9

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-7 Opening Template Projects

3-7-1 Specifying Template Projects (Flowchart Step 1)

1. Select .

2. The Select Project Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the project to be specified as a template project and click the

Open

Button.

Reference

When changing template projects, specify the project again by selecting

File – Select Template

Project

.

3-7-2 Reusing Screens (Flowchart Steps 2 to 4)

1. The Select Template Dialog Box will be displayed each time a new screen is created. (Flowchart steps 2 and 3)

Select the screen to be reused. (Flowchart step 4 (a))

When not reusing the screen, click the

Cancel

Button to return to the standard procedure for creating a new screen. (Flowchart step 4 (b)) the Button.

3. The selected screen will be reused as the new screen.

3-10

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-7 Opening Template Projects

3-7-3 Canceling Template Projects

When a template project is cancelled, the Select Template Dialog Box is not displayed for creating a new screen, and the standard procedure is resumed.

(Procedure follows flowchart steps 2, 4(b), and 5.)

Click the

Cancel Template

Button in the Select Template Dialog Box.

3-11

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-8 Project Maintenance

3-8 Project Maintenance

Project maintenance includes functions to copy, delete, back up, and restore projects. The following maintenance functions can be performed.

Item

Duplicate

Delete

Backup

Restore

Details

Copies the specified project.

Deletes the specified project.

Backs up the specified project (specify floppy disk or folder).

Restores the backed up project data.

3-8-1 Procedures

The operating methods common for each setting item are explained below.

1. Select .

2. A dialog box will be displayed confirming whether to close the screen being edited. Click the

Yes

Button.

3. The Project Maintenance Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the desired tab.

4. Make the settings and then click the

Execute

Button.

3-12

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Copy

the Tab.

2. Set the source project and destination project.

1

2

3-8 Project Maintenance

No. Item Details

2 Destination

Project

Project Set the source project file name to be copied as a full path name. When the

NS-Designer is used to open the project, the project file will be displayed automatically.

Set the destination project file name to be copied as a full path name. the Button to display the Confirmation Dialog Box. Click the

Yes

Button to copy the project.

Reference

An existing project file can be specified as the project destination, but all the data in the previous existing project file will be deleted. (The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed.)

If the same project is specified as the source project and destination project, the data will be deleted before it is copied, so the data will be lost. Do NOT set the same project for the copy source and destination.

3-13

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Delete

the Tab.

2. Sets the project to be deleted.

3-8 Project Maintenance

1

No.

1

Item

Delete Project

Details

Set the name of the project file to be deleted as a full path name. the Button to display the Confirmation Dialog Box. Click the

Yes

Button to delete the project.

Reference

Projects being edited cannot be deleted. Close the project first, and then retry the operation.

Projects that have been deleted cannot be restored. Check the project carefully before deleting it.

Backup

the Tab.

2. Set the project to be backed up.

1

2

No.

Item

1 Backup

Project

2

Details

Sets the name of the project file to be backed up as a full path name. When the

NS-Designer is used to open the project, the project file is displayed automatically.

Backup To When a floppy disk is selected, the backup file will be saved on the floppy disk. Prepare the specified number of 1.44-Mbyte floppy disks. When a folder is selected, the backup file will be saved in the folder. A file is created at the backup destination under the name

[

project name

].XXX (XXX = 000, 001, …).

3-14

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-8 Project Maintenance

the Button to display the Confirmation Dialog Box. Click the

Yes

Button to back up the project.

4. When the backup destination is the floppy disk, the number of floppy disks required will be displayed. When more than one floppy disk is required, switch the floppy disks according to the messages displayed.

Reference

If the same backup file of the project already exists in the backup destination, the previously existing backup file will be deleted and a new backup file will be created.

Restore

the Tab.

2. Set the project to be restored.

1

2

No. Item

1 Restore

Source

2 Restore

Destination

Details

When floppy disk is selected, the backup file stored in the floppy disk will be restored.

When folder is selected, the backup file stored on the hard disk will be restored.

Sets the name of the project file to be restored as a full path name.

Specify the name of the project file with the same name as that of the backup file. Example: If the backup file is

TEST.000

, then specify the project name as

TEST.IPP

(any path can be specified). the Button to display the confirmation dialog box. Click the

Yes

Button to restore the project.

4. When floppy disk is set as the restore source, switch the floppy disks according to the messages displayed.

3-15

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-8 Project Maintenance

Reference

An existing project file can be specified as the restore destination, but the data in the existing project file will be deleted. The alarm/event data, however, will not be deleted. The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed.

An error will occur if no project with the same name as the backup file exists in the restore destination. If this error occurs, create a project file with the same name as the backup file, and then restore the project.

3-16

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-9 Project Properties

3-9 Project Properties

Properties can be set for projects. The following items can be set.

Item

Title

Switch Label

Macro

Select Language

Pop-up Menu

Macro Option

Numeral Input Option

Input Status Color

Data Format

Details

Set the project title (up to 64 characters).

Set the number of labels (1 to 16) and the label names (up to 15 characters).

Register the macros to be used for the project.

Select the system language to be used for the PT display.

Set pop-up menus using word buttons, command buttons, and String Display & Input.

Set whether “\n” that is included in the character string when using message box macros (MSGBOX) is to be handled as a line-feed code.

Set either to display present values or delete the current string and input a new string in the display column when performing numerical input for Numerical Display & Input objects.

Set the display color for text and background in the input field when inputting Numerical Display & Input objects, String Display & Input objects, and Temporary Input objects.

Set the data format for specifying line numbers in indirectly specified files.

3-9-1 Procedure

The operating methods common for each project property setting item are explained below.

1. Select

Settings

-

Project properties

.

2. The Project Properties Dialog Box will be displayed.

3. Make the settings and then click the

OK

Button.

The settings method for each setting item is explained next.

Title

Select the

Title

Tab.

Set a title of up to 64 characters.

Switch Label

1. Select the

Switch Label

Tab.

2. Make the switch label settings.

3-17

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1

2

3

4

3-9 Project Properties

No.

1

Item

No. of Labels

3

4

Label Name

Initial Label

Details

Set how many labels can be switched (1 to 16).

Set the label number to be switched.

Set a label name of up to 15 characters.

Set the label number shown on the screen after the power to the PT is turned ON.

The default setting is 0.

Macro

1. Select the

Macro

Tab.

2. Register the macros to be used for the project. Refer to

6-1 Registering Macros

for details on how to set macros.

Select Language

1. Select the

Select Language

Tab.

2. Select the system language to be used for the PT display. “System language” is the language used for PT display characters, such as in system menus, keypads, and dialog boxes.

3-18

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-9 Project Properties

R e f f e r r e n c e

If the character display format is set to ASCII code for string display and input, restore display, and data block tables (character string fields), the characters used for PT display are determined by the following character codes, according to the system language.

System language Character display Example (character code: B5)

Japanese

English

Shift JIS code

Latin 1 code

µ

If the character strings for label objects are indirectly specified, these characters will also be determined in the way shown in the table.

Pop-up Menu

the Tab.

2. Make the settings for the pop-up menu used for setting Word Button, Command Button, and String

Display & Input objects.

1

2

3

4

No. Item

1 Text

2 Background Color

4

Show Delimiter

Details

Set the text color used in the pop-up menu.

Set the background color of the pop-up menu.

Set the font size used in the pop-up menu.

Select to display lines separating items in the pop-up menu.

Reference

The settings made on the Pop-up Menu Tab Page are not applied by the Test Tool in the

NS-Designer. To check the results of settings made on the Pop-up Menu Tab Page, transfer the project to the PT and check operation on the PT.

3-19

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-9 Project Properties

Macro Option

the Tab.

2. Select to display messages over multiple lines by handling the “\n” in the character string as a line-feed code when using the message box macro (MSGBOX).

Numeral Input

the Tab.

2. Set either to display or delete present values when inputting numerical values in Numerical Display

& Input objects.

Input Status Color

the Tab.

2. Set the Text and background colors used in the input field when inputting numerical values or character strings for Numerical Display & Input objects, String Display & Input objects, and Temporary Input objects.

3-20

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

3-10 Changing the PT Model

Data Format

the Tab.

2. Set the data format to BCD or binary for specifying the line numbers in indirectly specified files.

3-10 Changing the PT Model

This function changes the model of the NS-series PT that supports the project.

1. Select

Settings

Conversion Change PT Model

.

The PT Model Dialog Box will be displayed.

2. Select the PT model to be changed, and then click the

OK

Button.

3. A message to confirm the model change will be displayed. Click the

Yes

Button to change the model.

3-21

Section 3 Manipulating Project Files

NS-Designer Operation Manual

When the PT model is changed, the screen size will change as follows:

Model before changing

NS12

Model after changing

NS10

3-10 Changing the PT Model

Screen size conversion

NS10

NS8

NS8

NS5-SQ/TQ

NS5-MQ

NS12

NS8

NS5-SQ/TQ

NS5-MQ

NS12

Converts the basic screen size to 640

×

480 dots.

Pop-up screens that are larger than 640

×

480 dots are converted to 640

×

480 dots.

Converts the basic screen size to 320

×

240 dots.

Pop-up screens that are larger than 320

×

240 dots are converted to 320

×

240 dots.

Converts the basic screen size to 800

×

600 dots.

No conversion.

Converts the basic screen size to 320

×

240 dots.

Pop-up screens that are larger than 320

×

240 dots are converted to 320

×

240 dots.

Converts the basic screen size to 800

×

600 dots.

NS5-SQ/TQ

NS5-MQ

NS5-SQ/TQ

NS5-MQ

NS12

NS10

NS8

NS12

NS10

NS8

Converts the basic screen size to 320

×

240 dots.

Pop-up screens that are larger than 320

×

240 dots are converted to 320

×

240 dots.

Converts the basic screen size to 800

×

600 dots.

Converts the basic screen size to 640

×

480 dots.

Converts the basic screen size to 800

×

600 dots.

Converts the basic screen size to 640

×

480 dots.

Reference

When the model has been changed from the NS12, NS10, or NS5 to the NS8 (or, conversely, from the NS8 to the NS12, NS10, or NS5), the size of the intervals in the touch-sensitive mesh are different, so it may not be possible to press some of the functional objects. After conversion, always check that the functional objects are above the touch-sensitive mesh size by running validation from the Tools Menu. Refer to

Section 9 Validation

for details on the validation function.

Although screen data for the NS5-MQ0 @ -V2 is displayed in monochrome/16 grayscale levels on the ♦

NS-Designer displays and the NS5-MQ0 @ -V2 screen, the data will be displayed in color if it is converted to data for a PT model with color displays on the NS-Designer or transferred to a PT with a color display screen. The color codes that are used when creating the screen data for the

NS5-MQ0 @ -V2 will be displayed for screen data and the image colors will be used for BMP and

JPEG data.

All screen data created for PTs with color displays will be displayed in monochrome/16 grayscale levels if the screen data is converted for the NS5-MQ0 @ -V2 on the NS-Designer or it is transferred to the NS5-MQ0 @ -V2.

3-22

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

This section describes the basic operations for the screens that can be displayed on the PT.

4-2 Creating and Saving Screens......................................................................................................................4-18

4-3 Sheets .........................................................................................................................................................4-24

4-4 Frames........................................................................................................................................................4-28

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-1 Basic Operations

4-1 Basic Operations

The operating methods common to each screen are explained here.

4-1-1 Setting Screen Properties

Set the properties for the screen currently being edited. The following items can be set using this function.

Item

Title

Size/Pop-up

Background/Others

Macro

Details

Set the title of the edited screen (up to 64 characters).

Set the types of edit screen (base screen or pop-up screen) and screen size.

Set the screen background and data file compression settings.

Register the macros to be set for the screen.

Detail setting Set the macro execution timing for the SAP (Smart Active Parts) library. For details, refer to

How to use Smart Active Parts

(PDF) included with the NS-Designer.

Procedure

The operating methods common for each setting item are explained here.

1. Select

Settings

-

Screen Properties

.

2. The Screen Properties Dialog Box will be displayed.

3. Make the settings and then click the

OK

Button.

The settings method for each setting item is explained here.

Screen Title

1. Select the

Title

Tab.

2. Set a title of up to 64 characters.

4-1

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Size/Pop-up

1. Select the

Size/Pop-up

Tab.

2. Set the screen size and pop-up screen setting.

1

2

3

4

4-1 Basic Operations

No.

2

Item Details

Set the PT screen display size.

The maximum screen size that can be set depends on the PT model selected.

NS12: Up to 796 dots horizontal

×

566 dots vertical with title bar.

Up to 796 dots horizontal

×

596 dots vertical without title bar.

NS10, NS8: Up to 636 dots horizontal

×

446 dots vertical with title bar.

Up to 636 dots horizontal

×

476 dots vertical without title bar.

NS5: Up to 316 dots horizontal

×

206 dots vertical with title bar.

Up to 316 dots horizontal

×

236 dots vertical without title bar.

Select this item to set the size as the default the next time a new screen is created.

Use as Default

Screen Size

Use as Pop-up

Screen

Select this item to use the screen as a pop-up screen when the PT is running.

When not selected, the screen is used as a base screen.

Screen number 0 cannot be set as a pop-up screen.

Settings of other screens can be changed freely.

Screen

Display Position Select the position from one of the following settings.

Center of Screen, Top Left of Screen, Bottom Left of Screen, Top Right of

Screen, Bottom Right of Screen, or Any Position. When Any Position is selected, specify the X and Y coordinates for the top left of the pop-up screen.

Setting

Screen

Each of the setting items is as follows: Select each item to enable the setting.

Enable input on other screens

Closes when base screen switches

No title bar

Reference

If

No title bar

is selected under

Pop-up Screen Setting

, the screen’s frame will not be displayed when the screen is displayed on the PT.

Title bar and frame displayed

No title bar or frame displayed

If

Any Position

is selected under

Pop-up Screen Display Position

and the values input for the screen coordinates are out of range, the pop-up screen will be displayed as a full screen.

4-2

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Background/Others

1. Select the

Background/Others

Tab.

2. Set the screen background and data file compression settings.

1

2

3

4

4-1 Basic Operations

No.

4

Edit

Item

Use as Default

Background Color

Select File Name

Select

Details

Select the screen’s background color from 256 options.

Click the

Set Color

Button to display the Color Setting Dialog Box. Select the background color from the dialog box.

Select this item to set the background color as the default next time a new screen is created.

Specify the background file.

Select to specify an image file as the screen background. The following files can be specified.

Specify a file name as a character string of up to 12 characters (up to 8 characters for the file name and 3 characters for the extension). The following characters can be used for file names:

Alphanumerics, underscore (_), dollar sign ($), and period (.)

BMP and JPEG file formats are supported.

Click the

Select

Button to open the File Dialog Box. Select the file from the dialog box.

Click the

Edit

Button to start the image editor and allow the background to be edited. Specify the image editor to be started up in the Editor Tab Page of the

Options Dialog Box (

Tools - Options

).

Select this item to save the screen data file in compressed format.

Data File

The order of display

Display all objects at once.

(Recommended)

Display frames and fixed objects first.

Select this item to display all objects at once after getting information that is necessary to display the objects.

Select this item to display frames and fixed objects first and then display all of the other objects after getting the necessary information.

Reference

Bitmap files (BMP or JPEG) that conform to Microsoft Windows standards can be set for the background.

Specify which application to start up as the image editor under

Tools - Options

.

4-3

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-1 Basic Operations

Macro

1. Select the

Macro

Tab.

2. Register the macros to be used for the screen. Refer to

6-1 Registering Macros

for details on how to register macros.

4-1-2 Grid Setting

The formation of squares set at equal intervals on the screen is called the grid.

This function sets whether to show or hide the grid and the size of the grid interval.

1. Select to display the Set Grid Dialog Box.

1

2

3

No.

2

4

Item

Snap to Grid

Check when grid is not clear

4

Details

Select this item to display the grid lines. The grid serves as a guide for arranging the functional objects.

Select this item to enable the grid. Enabling the grid allows functional objects to be snapped to the grid when moving them.

Specify the width and height of the grid intervals in dot units.

Select this item to reverse the color of the grid line. Use this setting if the grid lines are not clear because they are a similar color to the background.

4-4

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-1 Basic Operations

Items

The methods for switching the display type on the screen and confirming object settings are described here.

Simulate ON/OFF

This function can be used to display the form of a functional object on the current screen when the status of the address is ON. (The default is OFF.)

OFF Status ON Status

Select

View - Simulate ON/OFF

or click the

Simulate ON/OFF

Button in the toolbar.

Toolbar

Reference

The symbol before the

Simulate ON/OFF

Menu item indicates that simulate ON status is currently displayed.

To return to simulate OFF status, select

View - Simulate ON/OFF

or click the

Simulate ON/OFF

Button in the toolbar again.

4-5

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-1 Basic Operations

Show ID

This function displays the ID numbers assigned to objects, except those assigned to tables.

ID numbers are assigned to objects automatically in the order that the objects are created.

Show ID

Select

View - Show ID

or click the

Show ID

Button in the toolbar.

Toolbar

Reference

The symbol before the

Show ID

Menu item indicates that the ID numbers are currently displayed.

To return to the normal display, select

View - Show ID

or click the

Show ID

Button in the toolbar again.

The ID numbers can be displayed in a small font. The procedure is as follows:

1. Select

Tools - Options

.

2. Select the

Edit/Disp.

Tab.

3. Select

Use small font for ID display

.

When an object is deleted causing a break in the sequence of ID numbers, the missed ID number will be allocated to the object that is created next.

When a table is created, ID numbers are assigned to the table itself as well as to the functional objects contained in it. When the ID numbers are displayed, however, the ID numbers of the functional objects in the table will be displayed without showing the table ID number.

4-6

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-1 Basic Operations

Functional Object IDs

A functional object ID consists of the object type and four-digit numerals.

Type

Buttons

Lamps

Data Log

Data Block

Others

Displays &

Inputs

Alarm

Displays

System Clock

Functional object

ON/OFF Buttons

Word Buttons

Command Buttons

Bit Lamps

Word Lamps

Numeral Displays & Inputs

String Displays & Inputs

Thumbwheel Switches

Temporary Inputs

Text

List Selection

Level Meter

Bitmap

Analogue Meter

Broken-line Graph

Video Display

Alarm Display

Alarm/Event Summary History

Date

Time

Data Log Graph

Data Block Table

Frame

Table

ID

PB0000 to PB1023

PBW0000 to PBW1023

PBC0000 to PBC1023

PL0000 to PL1023

PLW0000 to PLW1023

NUM0000 to NUM1023

STR0000 to STR1023

THW0000 to THW1023

TMP0000 to TMP1023

LBL0000 to LBL1023

LST0000 to LST1023

LEV0000 to LEV1023

BMP0000 to BMP1023

ANA0000 to ANA1023

BLG0000 to BLG1023

VDO0000 to VDO1023

ALM0000 to ALM1023

ALS0000 to ALS1023

DAT0000 to DAT1023

TIM0000 to TIM1023

DLOG0000 to DLOG1023

DTBL0000 to DTBL1023

FRM0000 to FRM1023

TBL0000 to TBL1023

Fixed Object IDs

Fixed object IDs are displayed as 4-digit numerals.

0000 to 1023

Show Address

This function displays the address set for each functional object.

Normal Display Address Display

Select

View - Show Address

or click the

Show Address

Button in the toolbar.

4-7

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Toolbar

4-1 Basic Operations

Reference

The symbol before the

Show Address

Menu item indicates that the addresses are currently being displayed.

To return to the normal display, select

View - Show Address

or click the

Show Address

Button in the toolbar again.

The addresses displayed with this function contain the data set in the General Tab Page of the Object Properties Dialog Box for the functional objects.

Addresses are not displayed for data block tables.

4-8

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-1 Basic Operations

The following information is displayed in each functional object when Show Address is selected.

Type

Button

Button

Functional object

ON/OFF Button

Word Button

Display information

The write address, display address 1, and display address 2 are displayed in the following format.

$B100(W)

$B101(R1)

$B102(R2)

(W: Write address; R1: Display address 1; R2: Display address 2)

The write address is displayed in the following format.

Command Button

Switch

Screen

$W100

The set values are displayed in the following format.

Specified screen

50(P)

$W100(W)

(P: Page number; W: Page write address)

Indirectly specified screen

$W10(P)

$W100(W)

Command Button

Switch

Screen

(P: Indirect reference address; W: Page write address)

Selection by Pop-up Menu

POPUP

(POPUP is the fixed display.)

Forward

PAGE+

$W100(W)

(PAGE+ is the fixed display; W: Page write address)

Backward

PAGE

$W100(W)

Key Button

(PAGE

is the fixed display; W: Page write address)

KEYBUTTON

Control

Pop-up

Screen

Display

System

Menu

(KEYBUTTON is the fixed display.)

PCTRL

(PCTRL is the fixed display.)

SYSMENU

(SYSMENU is the fixed display.)

4-9

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-1 Basic Operations

Type

Button

Functional object

Command Button

Stop

Buzzer

None

Video

Capture

Display information

BUZZER

(BUZZER is the fixed display.)

NOP

(NOP is the fixed display.)

Contrast

Adjustment

Capture

(Capture is the fixed display.)

Contrast + 10

(The following function names and set values are displayed.)

- Contrast

- Brightness

- Depth

- Tone

Vision

Sensor

Console

Output

Data Block

Control

-FILE--PL

C

ESC

(The signal name is displayed.)

File -> PLC

Data Block

Control

-FILE--

NS,

NS--PLC

(The following control information is displayed.)

- File -> PLC

- PLC -> File

- Record Delete

File -> NS

(The following control information is displayed.)

- File -> NS

- NS -> File

- NS -> PLC

- PLC -> NS

4-10

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Type

Button

Lamp

Display

& Input

Functional object

Command Button

Data Block

Control

–Read

Record

Label

Bit Lamp

Word Lamp

Record Label

Display information

(Record Label is the fixed display)

The address is displayed in the following format.

$B100

The address is displayed in the following format.

Numeral Display &

Input

String Display &

Input

$W100

The address is displayed in the following format.

$W100

The address is displayed in the following format.

$W100

4-1 Basic Operations

4-11

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-1 Basic Operations

Type

Display

& Input

Functional object

Thumbwheel

Switch

Display information

The address is displayed in the following format.

$W100

Temporary Input The product name is displayed in the following format.

TEMPORARY

Display List Selection

Level Meter

Bitmap

Analogue Meter

$W100

File

LIST.lst

The border information is displayed in the following format.

(M:

(X:

(O:

(1:

(N:

(XA:

(0A:

(1A:

(NA:

$W120(M)

1000(X)

$W100(0A)

$W101(1A)

0(N)

Monitor address)

Max. fixed value)

Border 1-2 fixed value)

Border 2-3 fixed value)

Min. fixed value)

Max. indirect address)

Border 1-2 indirect address)

Border 2-3 indirect address)

Min. indirect address)

The file is displayed in the following format.

The set value is displayed in the following format.

Internal Memory ($W)

ERR.bmp

4-12

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-1 Basic Operations

Show Error Object

Objects for which errors were detected in validation are displayed with red borders. Refer to

Section 9

Validation

for details on the validation function.

Example:

Validation items

Overlapping of functional objects

Functional objects created inside screen/frame area

Select

View - Show Error Object

or click the

Show Error Object

Button in the toolbar.

Toolbar

Reference

The symbol before the

Show Error Object

Menu item indicates that the error objects are currently displayed.

To return to the normal display, select

View - Show Error Object

or click the

Show Error Object

Button in the toolbar again.

Show Sheet Object

This function is used to display the applicable sheet object.

The sheet object is displayed by default.

Sheet Objects Not Displayed Sheet Objects Displayed

Select

View - Show Sheet Object

or click the

Show Sheet Object

Button in the toolbar.

4-13

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Toolbar

4-1 Basic Operations

Reference

The symbol before the

Show Sheet Object

Menu item indicates that the sheet objects are currently displayed.

To hide the sheet object, select

View - Show Sheet Object

or click the

Show Sheet Object

Button in the toolbar again.

Refer to

4-3 Sheets

for details on basic sheet operations.

4-1-4 Changing the Display

The methods for changing the display on the screen are explained here.

Displaying Screens

The methods for switching the display of screen windows are as follows:

Cascade (

Window - Cascade

)

Cascades the open windows on the screen with the active window on top.

Tile (

Window - Tile

)

Tiles the open windows.

Arrange Icons (

Window - Arrange Icons

)

Arranges minimized windows.

The minimized windows are arranged from left to right at the bottom of the application window. (This command cannot be used if there are no minimized windows.)

Previous Screen

Displays the screen of the previous screen page number.

Select

View - Previous Screen

or click the

Previous Screen

Button in the toolbar.

Toolbar

Next Screen

Displays the screen of the next screen page number.

Select

View - Next Screen

or click the

Next Screen

Button in the toolbar.

Toolbar

4-14

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-1-5 Switch Label

This function is used to switch labels when multiple labels are registered.

4-1 Basic Operations

Switching Labels Backward and Forward

Switch labels by selecting

Previous Label

or

Next Label

from the toolbar.

Toolbar

Switching to Any Label

1. Select

View - Switch Label

.

The Switch Label Dialog Box will be displayed.

2. Select the label to be displayed and then click the

OK

Button.

Reference

Refer to

3-9 Project Properties

for details on setting multiple labels.

4-15

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-1 Basic Operations

4-1-6 Show Touch Points

This function is used to display the points where the PT touch points are positioned in the screen. Use this function to check that the functional objects are arranged above touch points.

Select

View - Show Touch Points

.

Note

Touch input will not be recognized if the functional objects are not created above the touch points. Therefore, always arrange the functional objects above the touch points.

Refer to

Arranging Functional Objects

under

5-1 Creating Functional Objects

for details.

Reference

The symbol before the

Show Touch Points

Menu item indicates that the touch points are currently displayed.

To return to the normal display, select

View - Show Touch Points

again.

4-1-7 Zoom

Zooms the screen display up and down.

Use the Zoom Dialog Box to specify the magnification between 25% and 800%. Select

Fit

to zoom the display up or down to fit the current window size.

1. Select .

The Zoom Dialog Box will be displayed.

2. Select the magnification and then click the

OK

Button.

4-16

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Using

Fit

4-1 Basic Operations

The same horizontal and vertical magnification are used full screen.

4-1-8 Refreshing

Refresh the screen to delete garbage on the screen and correct distortion in the display.

Select

View - Refresh

.

4-17

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-2 Creating and Saving Screens

4-2 Creating and Saving Screens

The basic screen operations are explained here.

4-2-1 Creating New Screens

Select

File - New Screen

or click the

New Screen

Button in the toolbar.

The New Screen Dialog Box will be displayed.

Reference

When a new project is created, the New Screen Dialog Box is displayed after the PT model has been selected.

New Screens

Select

New Screen

and then click the

OK

Button.

The new screen will be displayed.

Reference

The new screen will be automatically created in the screen with the lowest page number from the screens not being used.

Reusing Existing Screens

1. Select and then click the

OK

Button. Proceed as described below for new screens or for reusing screens.

4-18

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

2. The Reuse Existing Screen Dialog Box will be displayed.

Select the projects with the screen to be reused.

4-2 Creating and Saving Screens

3. The Select Page Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the screen to be reused and then click the

OK

Button.

4. When the screen with the applicable sheet settings is selected, the following dialog box will be displayed. To cancel the sheet settings, click the

No

Button and proceed to step 5.

The sheet will be copied with the same sheet number as that of the original sheet. If a sheet with the same sheet number as the copied sheet already exists, a message will be displayed confirming whether to overwrite the sheet. Click the

Yes

Button to overwrite the existing sheet with the sheet being reused. Click the

No

Button to use the existing sheet.

The selected screen will be used to create a new screen.

Reference

When using a screen created for a PT with color displays in creating a project for the

NS5-MQ0 @ -V2, the screen will be displayed in monochrome/16 grayscale levels in the preview.

When using a screen created for the NS5-MQ0

@

-V2 in creating a project for a PT with color displays, the screen will be displayed in color in the preview.

4-19

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-2 Creating and Saving Screens

Opening Existing Screens

1. Select

File - Open Screen

or click the

Open Screen

Button in the toolbar.

Toolbar

2. The Open Screen Dialog Box will be displayed.

Select the screen to be opened and then click the

OK

Button.

1

2

4

3

5

4-20

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-2 Creating and Saving Screens

No. Details

1

2

3

An asterisk (*) will be displayed in the pop-up screen.

An asterisk (*) will be displayed in pages where the error check detected an error.

An asterisk (*) will be displayed in the screen page being used.

4

5

Previews the selected screen. The screen will not be previewed if the check is removed from the

Preview

check box.

Display a specified screen by specifying the screen page number and clicking the

Jump

Button.

3. The selected screen will be displayed.

Reference

The shortcut keys for opening screens are the

Ctrl + O

Keys.

When an unused screen page number is opened, a new screen will be created.

Saving Screens

Select

File - Save Screen

or click the

Save Screen

Button in the toolbar.

Toolbar

Reference

The shortcut keys for saving screens are the

Ctrl + S

Keys.

If a screen has been changed but not saved yet, a dialog box confirming whether to save the changes will be displayed when the screen is closed.

Click the

Yes

Button to save the changes.

The setting for whether the screen is a pop-up screen is saved in the project file (*.IPP). Therefore, even if pop-up screen is set in the screen properties, the screen will operate as a base screen when running the PT if the project has not been saved.

After changing the setting from a base screen to a pop-up screen, the relationship between whether the project or screen is saved and operations at the PT is as follows:

Save project

Yes

Save screen

Yes

Operations at the PT

Operates as a pop-up screen.

Operates as a pop-up screen.

No Yes

Yes: Saves; No: Does not save last saved.)

Operates as a base screen.

4-21

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-2 Creating and Saving Screens

Close Screen

1. Select

File - Close Screen

or click the

Close

Button

Screen Zoomed Out

at the top right of the screen.

Screen Zoomed In

Click

Click

Save All

This function saves the whole project as well as the open screen.

1. Select

File - Save All

.

2. The following dialog box will be displayed when saving has been completed.

Click the

OK

Button.

4-2-2 Screen Maintenance

Screen data maintenance, such as copying and deleting screens, switching screen page numbers, and changing screen titles can be performed for the following items.

Item Details

Change Title

Duplicate

Delete

Switch Screen Page Number

Changes the screen title.

Copies the specified screen.

Deletes the specified screen.

Switches the screen’s page number.

4-22

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-2-3 Procedure

The screen maintenance procedure is as follows:

1. Select

Tools - Screen Maintenance

.

The Screen Maintenance Dialog Box will be displayed.

4-2 Creating and Saving Screens

2. Select the screen on which maintenance will be performed.

3. Perform maintenance as follows:

Switching Screen Page Numbers

Click the

Move Up

and

Move Down

Buttons to switch to higher or lower page numbers.

Copying

Click the

Duplicate

Button to display the following dialog box, and then set the destination screen page number and the new screen title.

Deleting

Click the

Delete

Button.

Changing Titles

Enter the new title in the title column. the Button.

Reference

If the screen page number to be copied is already being used, the following dialog box will be displayed. Click the

Cancel

Button and specify a different screen page number to stop the screen being overwritten.

Screens that have been deleted cannot be restored. Therefore, check the screen page number carefully before deleting it.

4-23

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-3 Sheets

4-3 Sheets

The basic sheet operations are explained here.

Sheets are screens that can be displayed in layers on multiple user screens. If, for example, objects common to each screen such as the date, time, and screen switching objects are created as a sheet, they can be used in more than one screen by performing some simple settings.

Base Screen/Pop-up Screen Sheet Screen

Applied

Reference

Video Displays and Data Block Tables cannot be created on sheets.

4-3-1 Creating New Sheets

1. Open the project that will be used to create the sheet.

2. Select

File - Open Sheet

.

3. The Open Sheet Dialog Box will be displayed.

Select the sheet page number to be created and then click the

OK

Button.

4. The following dialog box will be displayed.

Click the

Yes

Button.

The new sheet will be displayed.

4-24

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-3 Sheets

Reference

Sheets cannot be used to specify pop-up screens or background files, or to add macro functions.

The background color in the sheet is not applied to the destination application screen.

4-3-2 Opening Existing Sheets

1. Select

File - Open Sheet

.

2. The Open Sheet Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the sheet and then click the

OK

Button.

1

2

3

No. Details

1 An asterisk (*) will be displayed for sheets where the error check detected an error.

2

3

Displays a preview of the selected sheet. The screen will not be previewed if the check is removed from the

Preview

check box.

Display a specified sheet by specifying the sheet page number and clicking the

Jump

Button.

4-3-3 Closing Sheets

Select

File - Close Screen

or click the

Close

Button at the top right of the screen window.

Screen Zoomed Out Screen Zoomed In

Click

Click

4-25

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-3-4 Saving Sheets

Select

File - Save Screen

or click the

Save Screen

Button in the toolbar.

Toolbar

Reference

The shortcut keys for saving are the

Ctrl + S

Keys.

If a sheet has been changed but not saved yet, a dialog box confirming whether to save the changes will be displayed when the sheet is closed.

Click the

Yes

Button to save the changes.

4-3 Sheets

4-3-5 Applying Sheets

The methods for applying sheets to screens are described here.

1. Open the project where the sheet will be applied.

2. Select

File - Apply Sheet

.

The Apply Sheet Dialog Box will be displayed.

3. Apply the sheet to the screen. a. Select the screen. b. Select the sheet page number to be applied. c. Click the

Apply

Button.

A preview will be displayed of the screen to which the sheet was applied.

4-26

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-3 Sheets

1

2

3

4

5. Apply the settings and then click the

OK

Button.

Reference

If the sheet has not been saved, it will not be reflected in the preview display even when the

Apply

Button is pressed.

4-3-6 Sheet Maintenance

This function is used to display the list of sheets, copy and delete sheets, switch sheet page numbers, and change sheet titles.

Procedure

The sheet maintenance procedure is as follows:

1. Select

Tools - Sheet Maintenance

.

2. The procedure is the same as for Screen Maintenance. Refer to

Screen Maintenance

under

4-2

Creating and Saving Screens

for details.

4-27

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-4 Frames

4-4 Frames

Frames are used to switch a part of the display contents in screens.

Frames consist of more than one page. The display contents can be switched by switching the pages according to their address value.

The following objects can be arranged in the frames.

Fixed objects

Functional objects (Except Video Displays and Data Block Tables)

Tables

1. Select

Functional Objects - Frame

or click the

Frame

Button in the toolbar.

Toolbar

2. The cursor display will change to the following shape.

3. Move the cursor to the position of the frame’s first point.

4. Drag the cursor (by clicking the left mouse button and keeping it pressed while moving the mouse) until it is positioned at the end point of the frame display area.

Drag

5. Select the frame, and then select

Settings - Object Properties

or click the right mouse button to display the pop-up menu and select

Frame Properties

.

The Frame Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.

General Tab Page

1

2

3

4-28

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-4 Frames

No. Item

No. of Frames

Details

Set the number of frame pages and the number of the frame page to be edited.

Set the number of frames for which the display contents are changed.

Specify the frame page number of the screen being created. Page No. Edited

Set Background Color

2 Address

3

Select this item to enable setting the color of the frame’s background.

Frame with a Tab

Attach a Tab to a Frame

Tab Color

Tab Position

Set the address that specifies the frame page number to be displayed.

Examples: Displays frame page number 0 when $W0 is 0.

Displays frame page number 1 when $W0 is 1.

Displays frame page number 2 when $W0 is 2.

Set tabs in the frame. When the PT is running, click the tabs to switch frame pages.

Select this item to create frames with tabs for each page.

Specify the tab color.

Select the position of the tabs from top, bottom, left, and right.

Top Bottom

Tab Height

Left Right

Specify the tab height in 18-dot units.

Examples:

18 dots when the tab height is set to 1

36 dots when the tab height is set to 2

Control Flag Tab Page

This tab page is used to control whether all objects in the frame page have input enabled or prohibited, and are displayed or not displayed.

Item

Enable Input

Display/No Display

Details

Select to enable or disable input for all objects in the frame or specify indirectly using addresses.

Select whether to display all objects in the frame or specify indirectly using addresses.

Reference

If the frame is set to No Display, input will not be accepted, regardless of whether the functional objects in the frame are set to

Enable Input

.

When indirect specification is selected, the indirect input display can be controlled according to the specified address values, as follows:

Enable/Disable Input

Enable Input when address is ON

(Input is enabled when the specified bit is ON, and disabled when the bit is OFF.)

Enable Input when address is OFF

(Input is disabled when the specified bit is ON, and enabled when the bit is OFF.)

Display/No Display

Display when address is ON

(Display is enabled when the specified bit is ON, and disabled when the bit is OFF.)

Display when address is OFF

(Display is disabled when the specified bit is ON, and enabled when the bit is OFF.)

Always create screens so that objects are contained within the frames.

To set the communications address data format (BCD/binary) select and then set the format in the Data Format Tab.

Settings - Project Properties

4-29

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Size/Position Tab Page

This tab page is used to set the frame size and position details.

Size

Item

Height

Width

Top Left of

Screen

X

Y

4-4 Frames

Details

Set the size of the frame in dot units.

Set the height of the frame.

Set the width of the frame.

Specify the distance from the top left of the screen to the top left of the frame in dot units, and set the position of the frame.

Set the horizontal distance from the top left of the screen to the top left of the frame.

Set the vertical distance from the top left of the screen to the top left of the frame.

6. Make the settings and then click the

OK

Button.

The method for creating screens for each frame page is as follows:

1. Double-click the frame area.

2. The functional objects and fixed objects outside the frame area will be hidden, and edit mode will be enabled within the frame.

3. Screens are created using the same procedure as for normal screens.

4. Return to normal screen creation mode by clicking outside the frame area in the screen.

Normal screen creation mode Screen creation mode in a frame

Double-click

Return to normal screen creation mode

Edit frame page

Click

Reference

Video Displays and Data Block Tables cannot be created on frames.

The frame tab title is created using text objects. By creating text within frames, the tab titles that are not active will be hidden when the PT is running. Therefore, create tab titles when operating in normal screen editing mode.

Click the

Text

Button in the toolbar and paste the text. Position the text so that it overlaps the tab position.

4-30

Section 4 Screen Types and Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

4-4 Frames

Reference

If a message that overlapping objects is prohibited is displayed, select

Tools - Options

, and then select the

Edit/Disp.

Tab and deselect

Prohibit functional objects from overlapping

.

4-4-2 Switching Frame Pages

The methods used to switch frame pages when working in NS-Designer are explained here.

Switching Frame Pages Backward and Forward

This function is used to switch to the previous or next frame page.

Select

View - Previous/Next Frame Page

or click the

Previous/Next Frame Page

Button in the toolbar.

Toolbar

Switching to Any Frame Page

This function is used to display a user-specified frame page.

1. Display the Frame Setting Dialog Box.

2. Specify the page number to be edited.

3. Click the

OK

Button.

4-31

Section 5 Object Operations

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Section 5 Object Operations

This section describes common object operations.

5-1 Creating Functional Objects.........................................................................................................................5-1

5-2 Creating Fixed Objects.................................................................................................................................5-8

5-3 Pop-up Menus ............................................................................................................................................5-12

5-4 Editing........................................................................................................................................................5-13

5-5 Layout Functions .......................................................................................................................................5-25

5-6 Colors.........................................................................................................................................................5-35

5-7 Address Settings.........................................................................................................................................5-36

5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists ....................................................................................5-42

5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used................................................................................................................5-46

5-10 Batch Settings ............................................................................................................................................5-49

5-11 Listing Addresses Used..............................................................................................................................5-55

5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses......................................................................................................................5-59

5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects..................................................................................................5-63

5-14 Object Defaults ..........................................................................................................................................5-68

5-15 Editing Background Bitmaps .....................................................................................................................5-70

5-16 Options.......................................................................................................................................................5-71

Section 5 Object Operations 5-1 Creating Functional Objects

5-1 Creating Functional Objects

This section describes the process from placing a functional object on a screen through to starting to set the properties.

5-1-1 Creating One Object at a Time

Functional Objects

1. To create a new functional object, select either items under the Functional Object Menu or an icon on the functional object toolbar.

Toolbar

The cursor will change to the following shape.

2. Move the cursor to the position that will be the starting point for the functional object.

3. Drag the cursor to the end point for the functional object.

Drag

Reference

Hold down the

Shift

Key and drag the mouse to change the size of the object while preserving the original vertical/horizontal ratio.

Hold down the

Ctrl

Key and drag the cursor in the vertical or horizontal direction to stretch the object uniformly in that direction.

Deselect (turn OFF)

Prohibit functional objects from overlapping

on the

Edit/Disp

Tab Page in the Options Dialog Box (

Tools - Options

) to overlap functional objects with other objects.

5-1

Section 5 Object Operations 5-1 Creating Functional Objects

Note

Functional objects must be placed on touch points otherwise they will not be processed as events when they are pressed during PT operation. (See example 1.)

In addition, inputs are processed as events for the functional object located on the touch point for the touch switch that received the input. This means that if a point is pressed where no functional object exists but there is a functional object on the touch point in the same touch switch, the same processing will be performed as if the functional object itself was pressed. (See example 2.)

The position of touch points can be checked under

View - Show Touch Points

. Refer to

Show Touch

Points

under

4-1 Basic Operations

for details.

Touch switch (area surrounded by square)

Touch point

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

• • •

·

·

·

·

Not processed as an event even when button pressed.

Processed as a button event even if the gray area is pressed.

White section (center of button) is processed as an event. The gray area is not processed as an event.

5-1-2 Property Settings

Functional object properties are set in the Property Settings Dialog Box for each functional object.

1. Perform one of the following operations.

Move the cursor to the functional object for which properties are to be set and double-click the object.

Double-click.

Select the functional object and select

Settings - Object properties

.

Select the functional object and click the right mouse button. Select the object properties menu from the pop-up menu that is displayed. (The menu names differ for each functional object.)

Select the functional object and press the

Enter

Key.

5-2

Section 5 Object Operations 5-1 Creating Functional Objects

2. The dialog box for setting the functional object properties will be displayed.

Make the settings on each tab page.

3. Make the settings and then click the

OK

Button.

Reference

Click the Button to check the property settings on the screen while continuing to make the settings in the dialog box.

Perform the following procedure to display the Property Settings Dialog Box for the functional object as soon as the functional object has been created.

1. Select

Tools

-

Options

. the Tab and select (turn ON)

Open property dialog automatically after pasting an object

.

5-1-3 Creating Functional Objects Using Tables

Multiple functional objects of the same kind can be created at the same time by using tables.

The following functional objects can be created using tables.

ON/OFF Buttons

Word Buttons

Bit lamps

Word lamps

Text objects

Command Buttons

Numeral display and input objects

String display and input objects

5-3

Section 5 Object Operations 5-1 Creating Functional Objects

Item names

Rows (horizontal)

Columns (vertical)

Placing Tables on Screens

1. Either select

Functional objects - Table

or click the

Table

Button on the toolbar.

Toolbar

The cursor will change to the following shape:

2. Move the cursor to the position that will be the starting point for the functional object.

3. Drag the cursor to the end point for the table display region.

Drag

Setting Table Properties

Settings, such as the number of lines and columns in a table and the functional objects to be created, are made in the Property Settings Dialog Box for the table.

To display the Property Settings Dialog Box, select the table and select

Settings – Object Properties

, or right-click and select the

Table

properties from the pop-up menu.

The Table Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.

1

2

3

5-4

Section 5 Object Operations 5-1 Creating Functional Objects

No. Item

1 Table

Combo Box

Details

Sets the type of functional object to be created in the table and the properties.

Select the type of functional object to be created in the table.

Functional Object Default

Button

Allocate address automatically

Click the

Functional Object Default

Button to display the Property Settings Dialog

Box for the functional object selected from the combo box and set the properties for all functional objects created in the table.

If the address is to be automatically allocated, the start address must be specified beforehand.

Select

Allocate address automatically

to specify the direction and interval for functional objects in the table and automatically allocate the address. The direction can be selected as either horizontal or vertical.

Example: Start address for address allocation: $B100

Direction: Horizontal; Interval: 2

2

3

Item name and

No. of items

Position of item name

No. of items

Item Name

Default Button

Focus move direction by Enter Key

Sets the item name position and number of items for tables.

Item names can be set automatically using text objects.

The item name position can be selected from top line, left column, or top line and left column. Select

None

if item names are not required.

Set the number of functional objects to be set in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Click the

Item Name Default

Button to display the Property Setting Dialog Box for text objects and set the properties for all item names.

Right or left can be selected as the direction for input focus to move when the Enter Key is pressed after functional object input has been completed. This option is enabled for numeral display and input objects and string display and input objects.

Select

None

if focus travel is not required.

3. Make the settings and then click the

OK

Button.

Batch Table Settings

Batch property settings can be made for lines or columns of functional objects in tables.

1. Select one functional object in the line or column for which the properties are to be edited.

Making batch settings for the first line.

2. Click the right mouse button and select

Batch setting of table - Unit setting of column

or

Batch setting of table - Unit setting of row

from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

5-5

Section 5 Object Operations 5-1 Creating Functional Objects

3. The Table Setting Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the

Functional Object Default

Button to display the Batch Setting Dialog Box.

4. The rest of the procedure is the same as for normal settings.

Changing Table Size, Line Height, and Column Widths

The width and height of functional objects in tables can be freely changed in line or column units.

Changing Individual Line Heights or Column Widths

This section describes how to change the line height or column width without changing the size of the table.

The cursor shape changes as shown in the following diagram when the cursor is moved close to the horizontal or vertical edges of the functional object.

Drag the cursor in the arrow directions until the line or column has reached the desired size.

5-6

Section 5 Object Operations 5-1 Creating Functional Objects

Changing Table Size

This section describes how to change the size of tables without changing the ratio of the line height to the column width.

1. The cursor shape changes as shown in the following diagram when the cursor is moved close to the table.

2. Drag the cursor in the arrow directions until the table has reached the desired size.

Reference

The table width or height can be changed independently.

With the cursor changed to the shape, drag the cursor in the horizontal or vertical direction.

5-7

Section 5 Object Operations 5-2 Creating Fixed Objects

5-2 Creating Fixed Objects

This section describes the process from placing a fixed object on a screen through to starting to set the properties.

Either select items under the Fixed Object Menu or select an icon on the fixed object toolbar to create a new fixed object.

Rectangles, Circles, Ovals, and Straight Lines

1. Move the cursor to the starting point for the rectangle, circle, oval, or straight line.

2. The cursor will change to the following shape:

3. Drag the cursor to the end point for the rectangle, circle, oval, or straight line.

Drag

Polygons and Polylines

1. Move the cursor to the starting point for the polygon or polyline and click the left mouse button.

2. Move the cursor to the next point and click the left mouse button. Repeat this operation until all the points for the polygon or polyline are drawn.

Left click

Left click

Left click

3. Click the right mouse button at the last point to close the drawing mode for polygon and polyline.

Right click

5-8

Section 5 Object Operations 5-2 Creating Fixed Objects

Sectors and Arcs

1. Move the cursor to the starting point for the sector or arc and click the left mouse button.

2. Drag the cursor to draw a circle or oval.

A square mark ( g

) will appear at the 3-o’clock point on the circumference of the circle or ellipse.

3. Place the cursor on the square box. When the cursor has changed to a plus sign (+), drag the cursor to any position.

4. Click the right mouse button to close the drawing mode for sectors and arcs.

Reference

Hold down the

Shift

Key and drag the mouse to change the size of the object while preserving the original vertical/horizontal ratio.

Hold down the

Ctrl

Key and drag the cursor in the vertical or horizontal direction to stretch the object uniformly in that direction.

Deselect (turn OFF)

Prohibit functional objects from overlapping

on the

Edit/Disp

Tab Page in the

Options Dialog Box (

Tools - Options

) to overlap fixed objects with other objects.

5-9

Section 5 Object Operations 5-2 Creating Fixed Objects

Property Settings

Fixed object properties are set in the Property Setting Dialog Box for each fixed object.

1. Select the fixed objects for which the properties are to be set.

2. Perform one of the following operations.

Move the cursor to the fixed object for which properties are to be set and double-click the object.

Double-click

After selecting the fixed object, select

Settings - Object properties

.

After selecting the fixed object, click the right mouse button and select the object properties menu from the pop-up menu that is displayed. (The menu names differ for each fixed object.)

After selecting the fixed object, press the

Enter

Key.

3. The dialog box for setting the fixed object properties will be displayed.

Make the settings on each tab page.

4. Make the settings and then click the

OK

Button.

5-10

Section 5 Object Operations 5-2 Creating Fixed Objects

Reference

Use the following procedure to display the Property Setting Dialog Box as soon as a new fixed object has been created.

1. Select

Tools - Options

.

2. Select the

Edit/Disp.

Tab and select (turn ON)

Open property dialog automatically after pasting an object

.

5-11

Section 5 Object Operations

Edit and layout functions can be displayed on a pop-up menu.

To display this pop-up edit menu, select the object and click the right mouse button.

The items on the pop-up edit menu are the same for all objects.

5-3 Pop-up Menus

5-12

Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing

5-4 Editing

This section describes how to edit the types of object that are positioned on a screen.

5-4-1 Undo

Discards changes and restores the previous status. The undo operation can restore up to 10 previous operations. There are two methods for undoing operations.

Select

Edit - Undo

or press the

Undo

Button on the toolbar.

Toolbar

Reference

The shortcut keys for undoing operations are the

Ctrl + Z

Keys.

5-4-2 Redo

Redoes operations that were undone using the

Undo

function.

Up to 10 previous operations can be redone. (The number of redo operations is restricted to the number of operations that have been undone.)

Select

Edit - Redo

or press the

Redo

Button on the toolbar.

Toolbar

Perform the above operation again to go back one more status.

Reference

The shortcut keys for redoing operations are the

Ctrl + Y

Keys.

5-13

Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing

5-4-3 Cut

Cuts the selected object.

Objects that have been cut can be pasted to other positions or screens using the

Paste

or

Offset Paste

functions.

Offset Paste

can be used for functional objects only.

1. Select the object.

If multiple objects are to be cut at the same time, select all those objects at the same time.

2. Select

Edit - Cut

or press the

Cut

Button on the toolbar.

Toolbar

3. A dialog box to confirm the cut operation will be displayed. Click the

Yes

Button to cut the object or objects.

Reference

The shortcut keys for cutting objects are the

Ctrl + X

Keys.

Methods for Selecting Multiple Objects

1. Hold the

Shift

Key and click the object.

Click while holding down the

Shift

Key.

2. Surround the objects using the cursor.

Make the following settings if the confirmation dialog box does not have to be displayed before executing the cut operation.

1. Select

Tools

-

Options

.

2. The Options Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the

Edit/Disp.

Tab and deselect (turn OFF)

Display confirmation dialog when deleting objects

.

5-14

Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing

5-4-4 Copy

Copies the selected objects.

Objects that have been copied can be pasted to other positions or screens using the

Paste

or

Offset

Paste

functions.

Offset Paste

can only be used for functional objects.

1. Select the object.

If multiple objects are to be copied at the same time, select all those objects at the same time.

2. Either select

Edit - Copy

or click the

Copy

Button on the toolbar.

Toolbar

Reference

The shortcut keys for copying are the

Ctrl + C

Keys.

5-15

Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing

5-4-5 Paste

Pastes objects that have been copied or cut to other positions or screens.

Standard Paste

Pastes the object with the same settings as the original.

1. Display the paste destination screen.

2. Select

Edit - Paste

or press the

Paste

Button on the toolbar.

Toolbar

Reference

The shortcut keys for standard pasting are the

Ctrl + V

Keys.

Offset Paste

Offset paste is supported only for functional objects. The functional object is pasted and allocated an address determined by a specified offset.

1. Display the paste destination screen.

2. Select

Edit - Offset Paste

.

3. The Offset Paste Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the offset value.

4. Click the

OK

Button.

R e f f e r r e n c e

The shortcut keys for offset pasting are the

Ctrl + W

Keys.

5-16

Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing

5-4-6 Delete

Deletes the selected objects.

1. Select the object to be deleted.

If multiple objects are to be deleted at the same time, select all those objects at the same time.

2. Select

Edit - Delete

.

3. A dialog box to confirm the delete operation will be displayed. Click the

Yes

Button to delete the object or objects.

R e f f e r r e n c e

The shortcut key for deleting objects is the

Delete

Key.

Select

Edit - Select all

to delete all functional and fixed objects on the screen.

Make the following settings if the confirmation dialog box is not required to be displayed before the delete operation is executed.

1. Select

Tools - Options

.

2. The Options Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the

Edit/Disp.

Tab and deselect (turn OFF)

Display confirmation dialog

when deleting objects.

In contrast to the cut operation, deleted functional or fixed objects cannot be pasted elsewhere.

5-4-7 Find

Finds functional object addresses, comments, or labels.

1. Either select

Edit - Find

or click the

Find

Button on the toolbar.

Toolbar

The Find Dialog Box will be displayed.

1

2

3

5-17

Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing

No.

Setting

1 Find

2 Find

3 Range

Current Screen

Whole Project

Screens

Details

Specifies the address, comment, or label to be found.

Selects address, comment, or label as the data to be found.

For addresses, click the

Set

Button to display the Address Setting Dialog Box.

Use this dialog box and enter the address to be found in the

Find What

column.

For comments and labels, enter the comment or label name to be found in the

Find What

column. Select (turn ON)

Match Case

to distinguish between upper or lower case in the search.

Select the search range from the following options.

Searches the screen displayed on top.

Searches the whole project.

Searches a specified range of screens. If

As Sheet No

is selected (turned ON), the search will target sheets.

2. Click the

Find

Button to start the search.

When the search has been completed, the Search Result Dialog Box will be displayed.

3. Select the desired functional object from the list of search results and click the

Jump

Button or double-click on the line to be selected.

The screen where the selected functional object is found is displayed and the functional object flashes because it is selected.

Select the object and click the

Jump

Button or double-click the object line.

The black square cursors will flash.

5-18

Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing

R e f f e r r e n c e

The shortcut keys for finding objects are the

Ctrl + F

Keys.

If

Current Screen

or

Screens

is selected for the search range, addresses set using the following menu items cannot be displayed. Also, if

Whole Project

is selected for the search range,

Jump

cannot be performed from the search results to the addresses set using the following menu items.

Settings - Flicker Setting

Settings - Alarm/Event Setting

Settings - Data Log Setting

Settings - Data Block Setting

Settings - System Setting

Settings - Project Properties - Macro

Settings - Screen Properties - Macro

5-19

Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing

5-4-8 Replace

Replaces an address set for a functional object with another address or replaces a host set in a project with another host.

Replacing Communications Addresses

1. Select

Edit - Replace

.

The Replace Dialog Box will be displayed.

1

2

No. Setting

1 Address

Range

Details

Specifies the address range to be replaced.

Replaces corresponding addresses in the range

Start Address

to

End Address

, starting with

Replace With (Start Address)

.

For the settings shown in the following dialog box, $B0 to $B100 will be replaced with

$B1000 to $B1100.

2 Range

To replace bits, specify the bit address, e.g., HOST:00000.00.

Select the replacement range from

Current Screen

,

Whole Project

, or

Screens

. If

As

Sheet No

is selected (turned ON), the search will target sheets.

2. Click the

Replace

Button. A message confirming the replacement will be displayed.

3. Click the

Yes

Button.

A dialog box to notify that the replace operation has been completed will be displayed.

5-20

Section 5 Object Operations

4. Click the

OK

Button.

Replacing Hosts

1. Select

Edit - Replace

.

The Replace Dialog Box will be displayed.

2. Select a host to be replaced.

5-4 Editing

No. Setting

1 Replace Select to replace one of the following:

Details

Address

Host and Replace host

Specify the name of the host to replace. In the following dialog box, "Serial A" is being replaced with "Serial B."

5-21

Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing

No. Setting

3 Range

Details

Set the unit number range when the search host is a Temperature Controller. The unit number ranges that can be set are as follows:

E5AN/E5AR: 0 to 31

E5ZN: 0 to 15

3. Click the

Replace

Button. A replacement confirmation dialog box will be displayed.

Click the

Yes Button.

4. A dialog box will be displayed when the replacement has been completed. Click the

OK

Button.

R e f f e r r e n c e

The shortcut keys for replacing addresses are the

Ctrl + H

Keys.

If

Current Screen

or

Screens

is selected for the range for address replacement, addresses set using the following menu items cannot be replaced.

Settings - Flicker Setting

Settings - Alarm - Event Setting

Settings - Data Log Setting

Settings - Data Block Setting

Settings - System Setting

Settings - Project Properties - Macro

Settings - Screen Properties - Macro

The addresses set in Internal Memory (Bit Memory and Word Memory) cannot be replaced.

5-4-9 Select All

Useful for selecting all objects or the same type of objects on a screen.

All Functional Objects/Fixed Objects

Selects all objects on the screen.

Select

Edit - Select All - All Functional Objects - Fixed Objects

.

R e f f e r r e n c e

The shortcut keys for selecting all functional and fixed objects are the

Ctrl + A

Keys.

5-22

Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing

Same Functional Object Type

Selects only the same type of functional or fixed object as one that has already been selected.

Select

Edit - Select All - Same Functional Object Type

.

Functional objects of the same type

Fixed objects of the same type

R e f f e r r e n c e

The shortcut keys for selecting all functional or fixed objects of the same type are the

Ctrl + D

Keys.

5-23

Section 5 Object Operations 5-4 Editing

5-4-10 Repeat

Copies the specified object the specified number of times horizontally or vertically. Functional objects

(including those inside tables or frames) can be repeated with an offset value set for the address.

1. Select the object to be repeated.

If multiple objects are to be repeated at the same time, select all those objects at the same time.

2. Select

Edit - Repeat

.

The Repeat Dialog Box will be displayed.

Select the repeat direction.

Specify the number of repeats.

Specify the interval for the repeats.

Specify the offset value to be added to the address for repeats.

3. Make the settings and then click the

OK

Button.

Example: To set 3 repeats in the horizontal direction at an interval of 8 dots with an offset of

2.

8 dots 8 dots 8 dots

Object repeated 3 times horizontally.

Section 5 Object Operations

R e f f e r r e n c e

The repeat function cannot be used for Video Displays and Data Block Tables.

5-24

Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions

5-5 Layout Functions

This section describes the layout functions used to change the size and position of objects on the screen.

5-5-1 Changing Size

1. Select the object for which the size is to be changed.

The cursor shape will change as shown in the following diagram when the cursor is moved close to the

marks at the corners of the object.

2. Drag the cursor in the arrow directions until the object has reached the target size.

R e f f e r r e n c e

Hold down the

Shift

Key and drag the mouse to change the size of the object while preserving the original vertical/horizontal ratio.

Hold down the

Ctrl

Key and drag the cursor in the vertical or horizontal direction to stretch the object uniformly in that direction.

The size of a Video Display cannot be changed by using a mouse. To change the size of a Video

Display, use the setting in the General Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box.

5-5-2 Moving

1. Place the cursor on the object to be moved.

If multiple objects are to be moved at the same time, select all those objects.

2. Once the cursor has changed as shown below, drag the object to the desired position.

Drag

5-25

Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions

R e f f e r r e n c e

Once the object has been selected, it can be moved by selecting

Layout – Nudge

or by using the

Up, Down, Left, or Right Keys. Refer to

5-5-6 Nudging Objects

for details.

A Video Display cannot be moved to the outside of the screen.

5-5-3 Aligning and Distributing Objects

Distributes multiple objects with top, bottom, left, or right alignment or at equal intervals vertically or horizontally.

Example: Placing Objects at the Top of the Screen

1. Select all objects to be top-aligned.

2. Select

Layout – Align/Distribution – Align Top

.

The selected objects will be top-aligned, in line with the upper coordinates of the object(s) at the top of the screen.

The following table describes the various position alignment functions.

Function Details

Align Left

Aligns objects to the left.

Center in a Column

Align Right

Aligns objects to the center of a column.

Aligns objects to the right.

Align Top

Aligns objects to the top.

Center in a Row

Aligns objects to the center of row.

5-26

Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions

Function Details

Align Bottom

Aligns objects to the bottom.

Distribute Horizontally

Distributes objects equidistant horizontally.

Distribute Vertically

Distributes objects equidistant vertically.

5-5-4 Make Same Size

Aligns the width and height of selected multiple objects.

Example: Aligning Size of Objects with Narrowest Object

1. Select all objects to be aligned by width.

2. Select

Layout – Make Same Size – Smallest Width

.

5-27

Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions

The following table describes the various size alignment functions.

Function Details

Smallest Width

Largest Width

Smallest Height

Largest Height

Aligns to smallest width.

Aligns to largest width.

Aligns to smallest height.

Aligns to largest height.

Table Column Width

Table Row Height

Aligns to equal widths.

Aligns to equal heights.

5-28

Section 5 Object Operations

5-5-5 Ordering Objects

Changes the display order of overlapped objects.

Moving Objects to the Front

5-5 Layout Functions

Moving Objects to the Back

1. Select the objects for which the display order is to be changed.

2. Select

Layout – Order – Bring to Front/Send to Back

or

Bring to Front

or

Send to Back

on the toolbar.

Send to Back

Bring to Front

5-5-6 Nudging Objects

Moves selected objects vertically or horizontally in 1-dot units.

When grids are enabled, the object is moved in the set grid units.

1. Select the object to be nudged.

2. Select

Layout – Nudge

and then select the direction to move the object.

R e f f e r r e n c e

Press the Up, Down, Left, or Right Keys to perform the same operation.

5-29

Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions

5-5-7 Rotating and Flipping Objects

Rotates objects clockwise or counterclockwise or flips objects. Grouped multiple objects can also be rotated or flipped.

Rotating/Flipping Around Object Rectangle

Rotates or flips the object around the center coordinates of the object rectangle. Any labels set to functional objects will not, however, be rotated or flipped.

1. Select the object to be rotated or flipped.

2. Select

Layout – Rotate/Flip

and then select the direction to rotate or flip the object.

Function Details

Rotate Right 90 Degrees

Rotate Left 90 Degrees

Flip Horizontal

Flip Vertical

R e f f e r r e n c e

When rotating or flipping grouped objects, the center of the grouped rectangle will be the center for the rotation or flip.

Video Displays cannot be rotated or flipped.

5-30

Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions

Rotating/Flipping Around Center of Screen/Frame

Rotates or flips the object around the center coordinates of the edit screen or frame.

1. Select the object to be rotated or flipped.

2. Select and then select the direction to rotate or flip the object.

Function Details

Rotate Right 90 Degrees Around Center of

Screen/Frame

Rotate Left 90 Degrees Around Center of

Screen/Frame

Flip Horizontal Around Center of Screen/Frame

Flip Vertical Around Center of Screen/Frame

R e f f e r r e n c e

Video Displays cannot be rotated or flipped.

5-5-8 Modifying Objects

Corner (node) positions and shapes of polylines, polygons, sectors, and arcs can be changed. Nodes of polylines and polygons can also be deleted or added.

Editing Nodes

1. Select the fixed object for which the shape is to be changed.

2. Select

Layout - Edit - Edit Node

.

The fixed object nodes will be displayed.

5-31

Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions

3. Move the cursor towards the node. When the cursor has changed to a cross (+), drag the cursor to the new position for the node.

4. Click the right mouse button to close the edit mode for nodes.

Adding Nodes

1. Select the fixed object to which a node is to be added.

2. Select

Layout – Edit – Add Node

.

The fixed object nodes will be displayed.

When the cursor is placed on the border of the fixed object, the cursor will change to the following shape.

3. Click the position on the border where a node is to be added. A node will be added between two existing nodes. Nodes can be added until there are only 4 dots or less between two nodes.

4. Click the right mouse button to close the add mode for nodes.

Removing Nodes

1. Select the fixed object from which a node is to be removed.

2. Select

Layout – Edit – Remove Node

.

The fixed object nodes will be displayed.

The cursor will change to the following shape when brought close to a node.

3. Click the node to be removed.

4. Click the right mouse button to close the remove mode for nodes.

5-32

Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions

5-5-9 Grouping and Ungrouping Objects

Grouping multiple functional or fixed objects allows them to be handled as one group when editing or adjusting layout. Grouped objects can also be grouped with other functional or fixed objects or placed in other groups.

Grouping Objects

1. Select the functional or fixed objects to be grouped.

2. Select

Layout – Group

.

R e f f e r r e n c e

The shortcut keys for grouping objects are the

Ctrl + G

Keys.

Video Displays and tables cannot be grouped.

The CSV file import/export function can be used to set functional object properties while the functional objects are still grouped (labels, comments, and addresses only). Refer to

Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files

for information.

Ungrouping Objects

Restores grouped functional or fixed objects to individual objects.

1. Select the group to be ungrouped.

2. Select

Layout – Ungroup

.

Reference

The shortcut keys for ungrouping objects are the

Ctrl + U

Keys.

Only one group can be ungrouped at a time.

5-33

Section 5 Object Operations 5-5 Layout Functions

Editing Properties of Grouped Objects

Edit the properties of grouped functional or fixed objects using the following procedure.

1. Move the cursor over the functional or fixed object to be edited, and double-click the left mouse button.

Double-click here to open the

Property Dialog Box for object A.

Double-click here to open the

Property Dialog Box for the box.

Double-click here to open the

Property Dialog Box for object C.

Double-click here to open the

Property Dialog Box for object B.

2. The Property Dialog Box for that functional or fixed object will open. Edit the properties as required.

Reference

If the mouse button is double-clicked at a position where two or more functional or fixed objects overlap, the Property Dialog Box for the top object will be opened.

To edit grouped functional or fixed objects as a device library object, select

Edit Smart Active Parts

in the

Edit/Disp

Tab Page opened from the Options Dialog Box (

Tools – Options

).

5-34

Section 5 Object Operations 5-6 Colors

5-6 Colors

Display colors for functional and fixed objects and other colors are selected in the Color Setting Dialog

Box. There are two kinds of Color Setting Dialog Boxes. Select the Color Setting Dialog Box that will normally be used from the Color Dialog Tab Page under

Tools – Options

. Refer to

5-16 Options

for details.

The method for displaying the Color Setting Dialog Box is described below. Refer to

Setting Colors

under

2-8 Common Functional Object Functions

in the

NS Series Programming Manual

for details on the dialog box.

Property Setting Dialog Boxes

Click the

Setting

Button next to the color settings column in each Property Setting Dialog Box to display the Color Setting Dialog Box.

Toolbar

Select the object and click the

Button on the color toolbar to display the Color Setting Dialog Box.

5-35

Section 5 Object Operations 5-7 Address Settings

5-7 Address Settings

Addresses used for referencing data required for display and for storing entered data can be allocated in any PLC area or PT internal memory area. The display status of objects can be changed and the PT status can be controlled and notified by directly writing to and reading from addresses during PT operation.

1

2

No. Setting

1 Address setting

2 Index setting

Details

Enter the addresses to be set. The address can be entered directly. Alternatively, click the

Setting

Button and enter the address in the displayed dialog box. If an invalid address is entered, an error message will be displayed when the

OK

Button is pressed. Invalid addresses cannot be set.

The index setting function is used to allow the addresses allocated to objects to be changed by changing the index attached to a specified area. These variables are called index setting. This enables one object to refer to many addresses. Area types, however, cannot be changed with an index.

There are 10 index settings available (I0 to I9).

Change the contents of system memory to change index setting. ($SW27 to $SW36)

Example Using Indexes

Specified Address: Serial A: HR00000.00I0

The communications address will automatically change based on the I0 value.

I0 ($SW27) value

0

Address

Serial A: HR00000.00

1

2

Serial A:

Serial A:

HR00000.01

HR00000.02

Enter index settings directly into the address input column.

R e f f e r r e n c e

If the address exceeds the setting range as a result of an index being specified, the address will be invalid and communications will not be processed.

Refer to

2-4 System Memory

in the

NS Series Programming Manual

for details on system memory.

5-36

Section 5 Object Operations 5-7 Address Settings

5-7-1 Setting Addresses

Click the

Setting

Button to the right of the setting column to display the Address Setting Dialog Box.

This section describes how to enter addresses using this dialog box.

1

2

3

4

No. Setting

1 Host

2 Area

3 Address

Details

Select the registered host name under

Settings – Register Host

or select the host from PT memory.

Select the communications area.

Word

or

Bit

specification are only displayed when those address types can be set.

For example, the

Word

option will not be displayed when making address settings for ON/OFF Buttons.

Displays and sets the communications address.

The host address is expressed as a 5-digit word address or 5-digit word address and 2-digit bit address. If the address entered here does not have enough digits, the number of digits are automatically adjusted and the address written to the address setting column.

Example: If word “1” is entered as the address:

“00001” will be entered in the address setting column.

Click the

Input

Button to enter the word or bit.

5-37

Section 5 Object Operations 5-7 Address Settings

5-7-2 Registering Hosts

Communications with multiple PLCs is possible with NS-series PTs. Specify a host name and addresses for each connected PLC to allow access to any PLC memory area.

Registering New Hosts

This section describes how to register hosts.

1. Select

Settings – Register Host

.

The Register Host Dialog Box will be displayed.

2. Click the

Add

Button.

3. The Edit Host Dialog Box will be displayed. Register all settings in this dialog box.

Enter a host name

(up to 16 characters).

4. Click the

OK

Button.

R e f f e r r e n c e

Up to 98 hosts can be registered, not including Serial A and Serial B.

Editing Registered Hosts

1. Select the host to be edited.

2. Click the

Edit

Button.

3. The Edit Host Dialog Box will be displayed. Edit the settings in this dialog box.

5-38

Section 5 Object Operations 5-7 Address Settings

4. Click the

OK

Button.

R e f f e r r e n c e

“Serial A” and “Serial B” are automatically registered as hosts when connecting to PLCs using serial ports A and B. This applies when

PLC

has been set to serial ports A and B under

System Setting

.

Only the host name can be changed in these cases.

To delete hosts, set serial ports A and B to

None

under

Settings – System Setting

(

Comm-All

Tab Page).

Deleting Registered Hosts

1. Select the host to be deleted.

2. Click the

Delete

Button.

3. A dialog box to confirm the delete operation will be displayed. Click the

Yes

Button.

R e f f e r r e n c e

“Serial A” and “Serial B” are automatically registered as hosts when connecting to PLCs using serial ports A and B. This applies when

PLC

has been set to serial ports A and B under

System Setting

.

Hosts cannot be deleted using the

Delete

Button in these cases.

If a host address is set to a functional object and that host is subsequently deleted, ??? will be applied as the address host name. An error check can be executed to check for illegal addresses. The alarm/event, Data Log, Data Block, and system memory addresses will not, however, be checked for errors.

Projects with ??? applied as the host name will not operate normally on the PT. Be careful with addresses when hosts are deleted.

Moving Registered Hosts

1. Select the host to be moved.

2. Click the

Move Up

or

Move Down

Button to move the host up or down.

Reference

“Serial A” and “Serial B” are automatically registered as hosts when connecting to PLCs using serial ports A and B. This applies when

PLC

has been set to serial ports A and B under

System Setting

.

Hosts cannot be moved in these cases.

Furthermore, other hosts cannot be moved above these two hosts.

5-39

Section 5 Object Operations 5-7 Address Settings

Importing and Exporting CSV Files

Use the CSV file import and export functions to edit settings efficiently.

1. Click the

Export CSV

or

Import CSV

Button.

2. To export files, specify the save directory and the file name and then click the

Save

Button. If importing from a CSV file, select the name of the file to be imported and click the

Open

Button.

3. An error check is performed when files are imported and any detected errors are displayed in a dialog box, like the one shown below.

1

2

No. Details

1 Displays the line number in the CSV file data where the error was found.

2 Displays the error number. Refer to the following table for details.

Error No.

1

Details Countermeasure

Format error in imported CSV file. Check that the imported file is in CSV format.

Check that the settings are valid.

2

3

Insufficient memory. Settings contained in CSV file cannot be imported.

Could not open the CSV file. CSV file could not be imported.

Close any unnecessary applications and re-execute the import operation.

Check that the file is not being used by another application. If the file is being used by another application, close the file and then re-execute the import operation.

The output CSV file will be displayed in the following format.

(When displayed using Microsoft Excel.)

The host ID is the number automatically allocated to the host when it is registered. The host ID does not change even if it is different from the number in the Register Host Dialog Box or if the host is deleted.

5-40

Section 5 Object Operations 5-7 Address Settings

Use 3 onwards when adding new hosts to the imported CSV file. Numbers 1 and 2 are reserved for the following communications settings.

1

2

Serial port A

Serial port B

Note

When CSV files are edited using spreadsheet software, a message warning that some changes may be lost if the file is saved in the current format may be displayed when the file is closed. This will not adversely affect PT operation.

Serial ports A and B can only be added or deleted under

Settings – System Setting

. Serial ports A and B cannot be added by importing CSV files. Serial port A and B information is not output when

CSV files are exported.

5-41

Section 5 Object Operations 5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists

5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists

Lists of property settings for functional objects in each screen can be displayed and checked and the order of the listed properties (ID No., comment, label, address, font name, text color, text attributes, color, etc.) can be changed. Also, the display can be changed, using the jump function, to the position of a specified functional object.

1. Either select

Tools – Functional Object List

or click the

Functional Object List

Button on the toolbar.

Toolbar

The Functional Object List Dialog Box will be displayed.

1

2

No.

Setting

1 Range

Details

Select the range for the functional object list display from

Current Screen

,

Whole

Project

, or

Screens

. If

As Sheet No

is selected (turned ON), the functional objects in sheets will be the range for the list.

Display

Method

The addresses set for one functional object are displayed horizontally on one line. Multiple Addresses in 1

Line

One Address in 1 Line

(Displayed in

Multiple Line)

The addresses set for one functional object are displayed vertically over multiple lines.

2. Make the settings and then click the

Display

Button.

3. The Functional Object List Window will be displayed.

5-42

Section 5 Object Operations 5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists

Properties

Displays the property settings for each functional object.

Reference

The shortcut keys for displaying functional object lists are the

Ctrl + L

Keys.

If the same address is used more than once in the same macro, that address is only counted as being used once.

Macro 1

to

Macro 4

only indicate whether or not macros have been set to that functional object.

These display items do not indicate whether or not addresses are used in macros.

Sorting by Settings

Sorts functional object lists in ascending or descending order of properties.

1. Click the titles of the properties to be sorted and select the whole column.

Click here.

2. Click the

Ascending Order

or

Descending Order

Button.

Sorting Addresses in Ascending Order

The addresses are sorted alphabetically, so $B30 is listed in this position.

5-43

Section 5 Object Operations

Sorting Addresses in Descending Order

5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists

The addresses are sorted alphabetically, so $B30 is listed in this position.

Jumping to Functional Objects

The display can be changed (using the jump function) from the list to the position on the screen of a specified object.

1. Click the number of the destination functional object to select the whole row.

Select the destination functional object.

2. Click the

Jump

Button or double-click the selected row.

The screen where the selected functional object is found will be displayed and the functional object will flash because it is selected.

Note

If

Minimize when Jump

is deselected (turned OFF) in the Functional Object List Window, the window will not be minimized when the jump function is used, but the destination functional object will flash because it is selected.

5-44

Section 5 Object Operations 5-8 Displaying and Searching Functional Object Lists

Saving to File

Saves the contents of the Functional Object List Window to a CSV file.

1. Click the

Save to File

Button in the Functional Object List Window.

2. The Save Used Functional Object List Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the directory and file name for the save operation.

3. Click the

Save

Button.

5-8-1 Redisplaying Lists

Click the

Display

Button in the Functional Object List Dialog Box to redisplay the list to change the display range or refresh the display.

5-45

Section 5 Object Operations 5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used

5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used

Lists the number of functional objects in the whole project or in a specified screen.

The display can also be changed (using the jump function) from the list to a specified screen.

5-9-1 Displaying Lists of Used Functional Objects

The method for displaying a list of used functional objects is described below.

1. Either select

Tools – List Up Functional Objects Used

or click the

List Up Functional Objects

Used

Button on the toolbar.

Toolbar

The List Up Functional Objects Used Dialog Box will be displayed.

1

No. Setting

1 Range

Details

Select either

Screen

or

Whole Project

as the search range for the list of functional objects used. If

As Sheet No

is selected (turned ON), functional objects in sheets will be the range for the search. Select

Whole Project

and select (turn ON)

Also

Display Unused Screen No.

to included unused screens in the search range.

2. Make the settings and then click the

Find

Button.

5-46

Section 5 Object Operations 5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used

3. The number of functional objects used are displayed in a tree structure for each screen, frame, and table.

Click

+

to expand the tree.

Screens with the functional object are displayed in green and those without the functional object are displayed in red.

1

2

3

4

5

6

No. Details

1

2

3

Displays the screen page number.

Displays the number of functional objects in each screen.

Displays the screen title.

4

5

Click

+

to expand the tree.

The number of functional objects in the frame are displayed for each frame page.

6 Displays the number of functional objects in tables.

5-47

Section 5 Object Operations 5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used

5-9-2 Jumping to Screens, Tables, and Frames

The display can be changed (using the jump function) from the List Up Functional Objects Used Dialog

Box to a specified screen or table or frame screen position.

1. Click the destination screen, table, or frame to select it.

Click here.

2. Click the

Jump

Button.

The selected screen will be opened. Alternatively, the table or frame will flash to indicate that it has been selected.

When a Screen Is Selected. When a Table or Frame Is Selected.

Reference

The jump operation can also be performed by double-clicking on the screen or table/frame line.

5-48

Section 5 Object Operations 5-10 Batch Settings

5-10 Batch Settings

Changes settings for the main properties of multiple functional objects of the same type from the functional object list. Settings for the following properties can be changed as a batch.

Comments

Labels

Addresses

Functional objects can also be added to or deleted from lists.

Functional Object Property Settings

Properties for each functional object can be set as a batch. This section describes how to change settings using ON/OFF Button functional objects as an example.

1. Select the functional objects for which the properties are to be set together.

Drag

2. Select

Settings – Change Settings at Once

.

Reference

The shortcut keys for changing functional object settings as a batch are the

Ctrl + K

Keys.

The Change Settings at Once Window will be displayed. The properties for the selected functional object will be displayed in a list.

3. Double-click the cell for the property items to be set to enter input mode.

Input mode

5-49

Section 5 Object Operations

4. Enter the settings data.

5-10 Batch Settings

5. Click the

OK

Button.

Reference

Addresses can also be set from the Address Setting Dialog Box.

Click the

Set Address

Button to display the Address Setting Dialog Box.

The batch-setting function cannot be used if functional objects of different types are selected. ♦

The batch-setting function cannot be used if frames or tables are selected.

Adding One Line

New functional objects can be created from the Change Settings at Once Dialog Box by adding a line.

1. Click a line to select it.

Click here.

2. Click the

Add Line

Button.

A new line will be added directly below the selected line. An ID number will be automatically added, using the next lowest free number.

A line is added.

Reference

The Add Line function cannot be used for Video Displays and Data Block Tables.

5-50

Section 5 Object Operations 5-10 Batch Settings

3. Click the

OK

Button. The newly added functional object will be displayed at the top left of the screen.

A new functional object is added.

Deleting Lines

Functional objects can be deleted by deleting lines from the Change Settings at Once Dialog Box.

1. Click the line for the functional object to be deleted.

Click here.

2. Click the

Delete Line

Button.

3. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the

Yes

Button to delete the line (and the object).

The line will be deleted.

A line is deleted.

5. Click the

OK

Button. The functional object will be deleted from the screen.

Reference

If the operation to delete all lines is performed, all selected lines will be deleted, but a new line will be added and a new functional object of the same type will be created.

5-51

Section 5 Object Operations

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Settings

The settings in each cell can be cut, copied, or pasted.

1. Click the cell with the settings to be cut or copied.

Select the settings item to be copied.

5-10 Batch Settings

2. Click the right mouse button on the selected cell. Select

Cut

or

Copy

from the displayed pop-up menu.

Click the right mouse button.

3. Click the cell where the settings data is to be pasted.

Select the target cell.

4. Click the right mouse button on the selected cell. Select

Paste

from the displayed pop-up menu.

Click the right mouse button.

5-52

Section 5 Object Operations

The cut or copied data will be pasted.

5-10 Batch Settings

Reference

Multiple settings can be selected and copied and pasted. Select all the target cells when performing the paste operation.

The shortcut keys for cutting settings are the

Ctrl + X

Keys.

The shortcut keys for copying settings are the

Ctrl + C

Keys.

The shortcut keys for pasting settings are the

Ctrl + V

Keys.

The shortcut key for clearing cells is the

Delete

Key.

Repeating Settings

Duplicates the settings for a selected cell. Addresses or character strings can be copied along with specified offsets for numeric values contained in them.

1. Click the settings item to be repeated.

Select the settings item to be repeated.

2. Click the right mouse button on the selected cell. Select

Repeat

from the displayed pop-up menu.

Click the right mouse button.

The Repeat Dialog Box will be displayed.

5-53

Section 5 Object Operations 5-10 Batch Settings

1

2

No. Setting

1 No. of Repetitions

2 Replace

Details

Sets the number of repetitions.

Replaces existing data with the repeat string.

Replace Number in

Character String

String Type

If

Replace Number in Character String

is selected (turned ON), the numeric value in the character string is incremented and the string is copied.

Offset

Select

Character

to replace numeric values in comment or label strings. Select

Address

to replace numbers in addresses.

Example:

Character

– Button 1, Button 2, Button 3,…

Address

$B0, $B1, $B2,….

Specifies the offset value to be added to the numeric value being replaced.

3. Make the settings and then click the

Repeat

Button.

5-54

Section 5 Object Operations 5-11 Listing Addresses Used

5-11 Listing Addresses Used

Displays a list of the number of functional objects using each address and a list of functional objects using each address. Can also jump to specified functional object screen positions.

Displaying Lists of Used Addresses

Displays a list of addresses that are used.

1. Either select

Tools – List Up Addresses Used

or click the

List Up Addresses Used

Button on the toolbar.

Toolbar

The List Up Addresses Used Dialog Box will be displayed.

1

2

3

No. Setting

1 Search

Details

Specifies the conditions for the address search.

Address Sets the start address for the search range.

No. of Addresses Specifies how many words or bits to search for from the address specified under

Address

.

Search until Max

No.

2 No. of Addresses

Displayed in 1 Line

3 Range

Select (turn ON)

Search until Max No.

to search until the largest bit or word from the address specified under

Address

.

Sets the number of addresses displayed in one line.

Select the search range from

Current Screen

,

Whole Project

, or

Screens

. If

As

Sheet No

is selected (turned ON), functional objects in sheets will be the display range.

2. Make the settings and then click the

Search

Button.

3. The used bits and words are displayed for each address.

White: Displays the number of used bits and words.

5-55

Section 5 Object Operations 5-11 Listing Addresses Used

Saving Search Results to File

Saves the list of search results to a CSV file.

1. Click the

Save to File

Button.

2. The Save List Up Addresses Used Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the directory and file name for the save operation.

3. Click the

Save

Button.

4. A dialog box to notify that the save operation has been completed will be displayed. Click the

OK

Button.

Reference

An example of CSV file output is given below. The search results are given for each address and separated by commas.

5-56

Section 5 Object Operations 5-11 Listing Addresses Used

Printing

Prints search results.

1. Click the

Print

Button.

The Print Dialog Box will be displayed.

2. Make the settings and then click the

OK

Button.

3. A dialog box to notify that the print operation has been completed will be displayed. Click the

OK

Button.

Note

An example of print output is given below.

List Up Addresses Used

Addresses

Searching Again

Click the

Search

Button and make the settings again in the List Up Addresses Used Dialog Box to re-specify the search range or refresh the data.

5-57

Section 5 Object Operations 5-11 Listing Addresses Used

Displaying Lists of Used Functional Objects

Displays a list of the functional objects that use the selected addresses.

1. Click the cell for the target address. The functional objects using that address will be displayed.

2. Click the

Details

Button or double-click the cell.

Double-click the cell.

A list of the functional objects using the specified address will be displayed.

No. of searches

Displays a list of the screen page number where address located, functional object ID number, comment, and label.

Jumping to Functional Objects

The display can be changed (using the jump function) from the list to the position on the screen of a selected functional object.

1. Select the target functional object.

2. Click the

Jump

Button or double-click the selected row.

The screen where the selected functional object is found will be displayed and the functional object will flash because it is selected.

Reference

If

Minimize when Jump

is deselected (turned OFF) in the List Up Addresses Used Window, the window will not be minimized when the jump function is used, but the destination functional object will flash because it is selected.

5-58

Section 5 Object Operations 5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses

5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses

Searches and displays in a list the status of addresses and functional objects in each screen. Addresses allocated to each functional object can also be replaced and search results can be output to files or printed.

Displaying Address Cross References

Searches and displays in a list the status of addresses and functional objects.

1. Select

Tools – Address Cross Reference

.

2. The Address Cross Reference Window will be displayed. Set the search conditions.

1

2

No. Setting

1 Range

Details

Select either

Whole Project

or

Screen

as the search range for the address cross reference display. If

As Sheet No

is selected (turned ON), address cross references in sheets will be the range for the search.

Executes the search and displays a list of search results.

Display Area

3. Make the settings and then click the

Find

Button.

A list of search results will be displayed.

Addresses and Functional Object ID Numbers (Screen Page Numbers)

Note: An “S” will appear before sheet page numbers.

Example: PB0001(S3) is an ON/OFF Button on sheet page 3.

5-59

Section 5 Object Operations 5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses

Reference

The shortcut keys for displaying address cross references are the

Ctrl + R

Keys.

If

Screen

is selected for the range, addresses set using the following menu items cannot be displayed.

Settings - Flicker Setting

Settings - Alarm/Event Setting

Settings - Data Log Setting

Settings - Data Block Setting

Settings - System Setting

Settings - Project Properties - Macro

Settings - Screen Properties - Macro

Replacing Addresses

After searches have been executed, addresses allocated to functional objects can be replaced in one operation.

1. Click the

Replace

Button.

2. The Replace Dialog Box will be displayed. Refer to

Replace

in

5-4 Editing

for detailed settings.

Reference

When replacing an address set as a flicker or alarm/event setting, or as a data block interlock address, include the relay number in the specified address. Replacement will not be performed properly if the relay number is not specified.

Saving Search Results to File

Saves the list of search results to a CSV file.

1. Click the

Save to File

Button.

2. The Save Cross Reference Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the directory and file name for the save operation.

5-60

Section 5 Object Operations 5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses

3. Click the

Save

Button.

R e f f e r r e n c e

An example of CSV file output is given below. The search results are given for each address and separated by commas.

Printing Search Results

Prints a list of search results.

1. Click the

Print

Button.

The Print Dialog Box will be displayed.

2. Make the settings and then click the

OK

Button.

3. A dialog box to notify that the print operation has been completed will be displayed. Click the

OK

Button.

R e f f e r r e n c e

An example of print output is given below.

Cross-reference

Address Functional object ID (Page) (Sn=sheet)

5-61

Section 5 Object Operations 5-12 Cross-referencing Addresses

Searching Again

Click the

Find

Button to re-specify the search range or refresh the data.

Displaying Detailed Functional Object Information

Displays detailed information for the functional objects that use the specified addresses. The following information is displayed.

Screen page numbers where the functional object is located.

ID number

Comment

Label

1.

2.

Select the addresses for which detailed information is required.

Double-click the selected row or click the

Details

Button.

The Search Result Dialog Box will be displayed.

Jumping to Functional Objects

Jumps to specified functional object screen paste positions.

1. Click a functional object to select it.

2. Double-click the selected row or click the

Jump

Button.

The screen where the selected functional object is found will be displayed and the functional object will flash because it is selected.

5-62

Section 5 Object Operations 5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects

5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects

A library is a collection of objects with set properties. Grouped objects can also be registered in the library.

Library objects can be easily placed and used as a single object on other projects or screens.

5-13-1 Registering Library Objects

An object and all of its properties settings can be registered to a library as one object.

1. Select the object to be registered to a library.

2. Either select

Tools – Register Library

or click the

Register Library

Button on the toolbar.

R e f f e r r e n c e

Video Displays and Data Block Tables cannot be registered in the library.

The Library Dialog Box will be displayed.

1

2

3

4

No. Setting

1 Category

Details

Displays the library configuration on a menu tree. Click

+

to expand the display to lower categories.

2 Category

3 Preview

4 Title

The category corresponds to the folder where the registered library objects are stored for easy management.

Displays a preview of the library object registered to the selected category.

Click the @ to select. The border will be displayed in red.

Displays the title of the selected library object.

5-63

Section 5 Object Operations 5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects

4. Select the storage locations of the category where the library is registered and the preview column.

5. Click the

Register

Button.

6. The Library Title Dialog Box will be displayed. Set the title for the library object to be registered and click the

OK

Button.

7. Make the settings and then click the

Close

Button.

R e f f e r r e n c e

If the

Register

Button is clicked while a location where library objects are registered is selected, the existing library objects will be overwritten.

Sharing Objects

This section describes how to share objects registered in the library and place these objects on screens.

1. Either select

Tools – Use Library

or click the

Use Library

Button on the toolbar.

The Library Dialog Box will be displayed.

2. Specify the category and select the library object to be shared in the preview column.

5-64

Section 5 Object Operations 5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects

3. Click the

Use

Button.

The Library Dialog Box will be minimized and the library object will be placed on the upper left of the screen.

Managing the Library

Categories and library objects are managed and registration data is changed from the Library Dialog

Box.

Either select

Tools – Use Library

or click the

Use Library

Button on the toolbar to display the Library

Dialog Box.

Adding Categories

1. Select the category above where a new category is to be added.

Example: Adding a “Command Button” below “Buttons”

2. Click the

New Category

Button to create a new category.

3. Enter the category name.

5-65

Section 5 Object Operations 5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects

Deleting Categories

1. Select the category to be deleted.

2. Click the

Delete Category

Button.

3. A dialog box to confirm the delete operation will be displayed. Click the

Yes

Button.

R e f f e r r e n c e

Be careful when deleting categories because all library objects registered in that category will also be deleted.

Changing Categories

1. Select the category for which the name is to be changed.

2. Click the

Change Name

Button.

The category name will be displayed in reverse video and can now be edited.

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Library Objects

This section describes how to cut or copy objects in the library and paste them to other categories.

1. Select the library object to be cut or copied.

2. Click the

Cut

or

Copy

Button.

3. Select the category where the object is to be pasted from the list of categories.

4. Click the

Paste

Button.

Deleting Library Objects

Deletes objects from the library.

1. Select the library object to be deleted. the Button.

R e f f e r r e n c e

In contrast to the cut operation, deleted library objects cannot be pasted elsewhere. Be careful when deleting objects.

5-66

Section 5 Object Operations 5-13 Library Registration and Sharing Objects

Changing Library Object Titles

Changes library object titles.

1. Select the library object for which the title is to be changed.

2. Click the

Change Title

Button.

3. The Library Title Dialog Box will be displayed. Set the new title and click the

OK

Button.

Refreshing Information

Data is refreshed from the Library Dialog Box.

Click the

Update

Button.

Viewing Library Object Previews

The view function opens and displays library object previews in a separate dialog box. If the library object is smaller than the display area in the dialog box, the object will be displayed at full size. If the object is larger than the display area, the size will be adjusted to fit the display area.

Click the

View

Button.

The library object will be displayed in a different dialog box.

Section 5 Object Operations

5-67

Section 5 Object Operations 5-14 Object Defaults

5-14 Object Defaults

Property settings when objects are placed on screens can be specified.

Defaults can be set for each functional object type and common fixed object defaults can be set.

5-14-1 Registering Defaults

Specific property values are registered as defaults. Registered properties are used as the defaults for the subsequent functional or fixed objects created.

1. Display the Property Dialog Box for the functional or fixed object with the properties to be registered as defaults.

2. Select (turn ON)

Use as default

.

R e f f e r r e n c e

Whether or not

Record Operation Log

in the Write Tab Page is checked cannot be set as a default.

5-14-2 Resetting Defined Defaults

Returns properties registered as defaults to the NS-Designer default settings.

1. Select

Settings – Reset Defined Default

and then select

Functional Object/Fixed Object

.

2. A dialog box to confirm the reset operation will be displayed. Click the

Yes

Button.

5-68

Section 5 Object Operations 5-14 Object Defaults

3. A dialog box to notify that the reset operation has been completed will be displayed. Click the

OK

Button.

5-69

Section 5 Object Operations 5-15 Editing Background Bitmaps

5-15 Editing Background Bitmaps

Image editing software can be started and BMP or JPEG files of background bitmaps can be created and edited.

1. Select .

The image editor will open.

R e f f e r r e n c e

If a background bitmap has been set already, that data will be read automatically.

If new BMP or JPEG files are to be used as background bitmaps, settings must be made in the

Screen Properties Dialog Box. Refer to

4-1 Basic Operations

for details.

The image editor that will be opened depends on the settings under

Tools – Options

. Refer to

5-16

Options

for details.

This menu cannot be selected if no image editor has been set.

5-70

Section 5 Object Operations 5-16 Options

5-16 Options

Makes optional settings for NS-Designer operations.

1. Select .

The Option Dialog Box will be displayed.

2. Make the settings and then click the

OK

Button.

Optional settings consist of the 3 types shown below.

5-16-1 Color Dialog

Selects the type of Set Color Dialog Box that will be displayed for setting colors. If

User Palette

is selected, up to 15 colors can be registered on the palette.

Click the

Test

Button to display a sample dialog box.

5-16-2 Edit/Disp.

Makes the settings for editing objects.

1

2

3

4

5

No. Setting

1 Open property dialog automatically after pasting an object

Details

Select this option to display the Property Setting Dialog Box immediately after pasting an object.

Select this option to prohibit functional objects from overlapping. 2 Prohibit functional objects from overlapping

3 Display confirmation dialog when deleting objects

Select this option to display a confirmation dialog box when cutting or deleting objects.

4

5

Show ID and address with small font

Edit Smart Active Parts

(SAP)

Select this option to display the ID number in small font when displaying the ID.

Select this option to open the property dialog of frames and functional objects that compose Smart Active Parts (SAP) without ungrouping the objects/frames. By enabling this option, objects can also be moved and the size of the objects can be changed.

5-71

Section 5 Object Operations 5-16 Options

R e f f e r r e n c e

Fixed objects can still be overlapped even if

Prohibit functional objects from overlapping

is selected

(turned ON).

5-16-3 Editor

Specifies the editor used when editing text or bitmap files.

1

2

No. Setting

1 Text

Details

Specifies the editor execution file name used when editing text files.

2 Image Specifies the editor execution file name used when editing bitmap files.

R e f f e r r e n c e

The executable file path for each editor depends on the operating system.

Re-specify the editor execution file if the operating system has been changed.

Object Operations Section 5

5-16-4 Labels

The magnification can be specified for automatic adjustment of font sizes set for labels in functional objects.

1

2

3

4

No. Setting

1 Scale

Details

Set the scale for automatically adjusting the font size. The magnification can be set between 50 and 100 (default: 80).

Display the information on text attributes in the sample display.

Attribute

5-72

Section 5 Object Operations 5-16 Options

No. Setting

3 Text Attribute

Details

Display the text attributes dialog box by clicking this button. The information on text attributes set here is displayed as the sample text attributes.

4 Sample Display as a sample the information after changing automatic adjustment scale or font attributes.

1

R e f f e r r e n c e

The font size and text color cannot be changed in the text attributes dialog box. The scale of raster fonts also cannot be changed. Therefore, font name pull-down menus are not displayed.

2

The following message will be displayed if the screen data being edited has not been saved when the Label Tab is selected from

Tools – Options

.

3

If this screen is displayed for screen data that has already been saved, click the

Yes

Button and save the screen data. Click the

No

Button to return to the Label Tab without saving the screen data.

Set the scale level and then click the

OK

Button in the option dialog box. The following message will be displayed.

Section 5

Click the

Yes

Button to select fitting to the Object Size using the set scale. This setting will apply to all the functional object labels for which the option

Fit the object size

is selected.

Object Operations

5-73

Section 6 Programming Macros

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Section 6 Programming Macros

Macros are functions that execute extra user-specified programs for projects, screens, and functional objects.

Arithmetic operations, discrimination between conditions, and other functions that are not normally supported can be added by the user.

6-1 Registering Macros.......................................................................................................................................6-1

6-2 List of Error Messages..................................................................................................................................6-8

Section 6 Programming Macros 6-1 Registering Macros

6-1 Registering Macros

Macros can be registered to projects, screens, and functional objects.

Register the macro by selecting the macro execution conditions and inputting the macro program in the

Edit Macro Dialog Box.

Click the OK Button after editing the macro to execute an error check. When an error is detected, an error message will be displayed in the error list. Refer to

6-2 List of Error Messages

for details on the messages displayed when errors occur. Macro editing cannot be exited until no errors occur.

1

2

3

4

No. Setting

1

2

3

Details

Execution Condition Displays the execution conditions for the selected macro.

Program

Select Command

The field used to input the macro program. Up to 3,000 characters can be input for one macro.

When a command is selected from the combo box, an explanation of the selected command will be displayed above the combo box. Click the Insert Button to insert the selected command in the program input field.

4 Error List Click the OK Button to display the error messages for the errors detected when the error check is executed.

When each error in the error list is double-clicked, the cursor will move to the position in the program input field where the error was detected.

Reference

Refer to the online manual under

Macro

in the Manual Folder in the NS-Designer Program Folder for information on macro programming methods. To access the manual, however, the online manual option must be selected when installing the NS-Designer.

6-1

Section 6 Programming Macros

Use the following procedure to register macros to projects.

1. Select

Settings - Project properties

.

2. The Project Properties Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the

Macro

Tab.

6-1 Registering Macros

3. Select from the following four execution conditions.

Macro execution condition

When Loading a Project

On timing Alarm/Event occurred

Description

Executes the macro immediately before loading the first screen after a project is opened.

Executes the macro when an alarm occurs.

On timing Alarm/Event is cancelled Executes the macro when the alarm is cleared.

When a bit changed/When a value changed

Executes the macro when the bit of the specified address turns ON or

OFF or when the value of the word of the specified address changes.

4. Click the

Edit Macro

Button to display the Edit Macro Dialog Box.

5. Input the program and then click the

OK

Button.

When a Bit Changes

6-2

Section 6 Programming Macros 6-1 Registering Macros

No.

1

Setting

Select

Details

Selects the bit change macro to set from

When a bit changed 1

to

When a bit changed 10.

Causes the bit change macro specified in 1, above, to be executed.

3 value

Action timing Sets the timing for executing the macro.

Executes the macro when the specified bit turns ON or OFF.

ON/OFF

Executes the macro when the specified bit turns ON.

ON

Executes the macro when the specified bit turns OFF.

OFF

When a Word Value Changes

No.

1

2

3

4

Setting

Select

Set x when a value changed

Address

Storage type

Details

Selects the bit change macro to set from

When a value changed 1

to

When a value changed 10.

Causes the value change macro specified in 1, above, to be executed.

Specify the communications address to be monitored.

Sets the storage type of the communications address to one of the following 10 types:

INT (signed 1 word)

UINT (unsigned 1 word)

DINT (signed 2 words)

UDINT (unsigned 2 words)

BCD2 (unsigned 1 word)

BCD2 (unsigned 2 words)

BCD1 (signed [leftmost digit: F] 1 word)

BCD1 (signed [leftmost digit: F] 2 words)

BCD2 (signed [leftmost bit: 1] 1 word)

BCD2 (signed [leftmost bit: 1] 2 words)

6-3

Section 6 Programming Macros

No.

Setting

6 value

Set value comparison macro

Value = Set value

Value > Set value

Value < Set value

6-1 Registering Macros

Details

Executes when the value at the communications address changes.

Executes the macro as given below based on comparing the value stored at the specified address and the set value.

Executes the macro when the value at the specified address equals the set value.

Executes the macro when the value at the specified address is greater than the set value.

Executes the macro when the value at the specified address is less than the set value.

Reference

If the bits/values at specified addresses changed at the same time, macros are executed in the following order.

Case

Specified addresses for macros turn ON/OFF at the same time.

Macro execution order

Executed in order from

When a bit changed 10.

When a bit changed 1

to

The same address is specified for multiple bit change macros.

Executed in order from

When a bit changed 10.

When a bit changed 1

to

The values for specified addresses for macros change at the same time.

Executed in order from to

When a value changed 1

When a value changed 10.

The same address is specified for multiple value change macros.

Executed in order from to

When a value changed 1

When a value changed 10.

The address set for an alarm/event macro turns ON at the same time as an address for a bit/value change macro changes.

Executed in order from the trigger macro and then the alarm/event macro.

Registering Macros to Screens

Use the following procedure to register macros to screens.

1. Select

Settings

-

Screen properties

.

2. The Screen Properties Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the

Macro

Tab.

3. Select from the following execution conditions.

6-4

Section 6 Programming Macros 6-1 Registering Macros

Macro execution condition

When Loading a Screen

When Unloading a Screen

Description

Executes the macro immediately before displaying the screen after it is opened.

Executes the macro immediately before the page is switched after closing the screen.

4. Click the

Edit Macro

Button to display the Edit Macro Dialog Box.

5. Input the program and then click the

OK

Button.

6-1-2 Registering Macros to Functional Objects

Use the following procedure to register macros to functional objects.

1. Display the Properties Dialog Box for the functional object where the macro is to be registered.

2. Select

Display Expansion Tab

at the bottom left of the dialog box, and then select the

Macro

Tab that is displayed.

3. Select from the following execution conditions. The execution condition depends on the functional object used.

6-5

Section 6 Programming Macros 6-1 Registering Macros

Macro execution condition

Touch ON Timing

Description

Executes macro the instant the functional object is pressed.

Touch OFF Timing

Before Inputting Numeral/

String

Executes macro the instant the functional object is released after being pressed.

Executes the macro immediately before the tenkey and virtual keyboard for inputting numerals and character strings are displayed.

Before Writing Numeral/String Executes the macro immediately before the host is notified of the numeral or character string that was input.

When Changing Numeral/

String

Executes the macro when the value in the address changes.

Executes the macro the instant the alarm display area is pressed. When Pressing a Display

Area

When Selecting an

Alarm/Event

When Selecting a List

Executes the macro immediately after selecting each alarm/event that is displayed in the Alarm/Event Summary History field.

Executes the macro immediately after selecting a line from the list selection objects.

4. Click the

Edit Macro

Button to display the Edit Macro Dialog Box.

5. Input the program and then click the

OK

Button.

6-6

Section 6 Programming Macros 6-1 Registering Macros

The execution conditions that can be selected for each functional object are shown in the following table.

Functional object

ON/OFF Buttons

Numeral Displays & Inputs

String Displays & Inputs

Text

Bitmap

Date

Time

Data Block Table

Touch

ON

Timing

Touch

OFF

Timing

When

Changing

Numeral/

String

No

Before

Inputting

Numeral/

String

No

Before

Writing

Numeral/

String

No

When

Selecting a List

Yes Yes No

Yes Yes No No No No

Yes Yes No No No No

No No Yes No No No

No No Yes No No No

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No No Yes No Yes No

No No No No No No

No No No No No Yes

No No No No No No

No No No No No No

No No No No No No

No No No No No No

No No No No No No

No No No No No No

No No No No No No

No No No No No No

No No No Yes Yes No

No No No No No No

Alarm/Event Objects

Functional object

Alarm/Event Display

Alarm/Event Summary & History

When Pressing a Display Area

Yes

No

When Selecting an Alarm/Event

No

Yes

6-7

Section 6 Programming Macros 6-2 List of Error Messages

6-2 List of Error Messages

The following table shows the details of error messages that are displayed in the Error List field after executing an error check.

Error message

Format error

Variable name error

( is missing

No. of ( ) does not agree

Position of , is incorrect

Function argument error

= command error

Details

The program contains elements other than variable name, function name, or programming that cannot be interpreted.

A variable name is incorrect.

The ( (left parentheses symbol) is missing from a function or sentence.

The number of ( ) (parentheses) in the program do not agree.

The position of the , (comma) in the program is incorrect.

The program contains an incorrect function argument, such as word memory being set in a position that permits bit memory only. Check the arguments that can be set by referring to

2-1 Function Argument Table

in the

NS12 Macro

Reference

included on the NS-Designer CD-ROM.

The program contains an incorrect substitution statement, such as 3=10 or

$B0=3.

End of program is incomplete The program that was input is incomplete.

If sentence error The program contains an incorrect IF, ELSE, or ENDIF statement.

, or ; is missing

FOR sentence error

The , (comma) after the function argument is missing or the program is not divided using a ; (semicolon).

A value outside the range 0 to 32767 is set for n in a FOR (n) statement, or

FOR is nested to more than 1 level.

6-8

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Section 7 System Settings

This section describes how to set the PT’s operating parameters and address allocations.

7-1 Settings .........................................................................................................................................................7-1

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

7-1 Settings

7-1-1 Common Procedure

Select

Settings

-

System Setting

. The System Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.

7-1 Settings

Click the

PT

Tab.

1

2

3

4

5

6

No. Setting

1 Startup Wait Time

Details

Set the time required before the PT starts communicating with external devices after turning ON the power or resetting the PT. The startup waiting time can be set to between 0 and 10 (unit: s).

2 Key Press Sound Select whether an input sound will be heard when an object is pressed.

ON: Input sound enabled

OFF: Input sound disabled

Select whether a buzzer will be heard.

ON:

OFF:

The buzzer is enabled at the following times:

When system memory bits $SB12 to $SB14 are ON

When an error occurs in the PT

When a message is displayed for the “

×

” and “!” icons

The buzzer is disabled

Screen Saver

Movement

Screen Saver

Startup Time

Changing Value

ERROR ON: The buzzer is enabled at the following times:

When an error occurs in the PT

When a message is displayed for the “

×

” and “!” icons

Set the various screen saver settings.

Select one of the following screen saver operations.

Display Erased: Erases the screen when it is idle for a specified time.

OFF: Disables the screen saver.

Set the amount of time after which the screen saver will start up. The time can be set to between 1 and 255 (unit: s).

Set whether to enable or disable changing monitor values for addresses displayed on the device monitor screen on the PT.

Enable: Monitor value can be changed.

Disable: Monitor value cannot be changed.

7-1

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

No. Setting Details

notification Select to prioritize notification of ON/OFF Button notification. of ON/OFF Button

7-1-3 Initial

Click the

Initial

Tab.

7-1 Settings

1

2

3

4

5

Setting Details

1 Initial Select the initial screen to be displayed when the PT starts operation.

Set the addresses where system memory is allocated. 2 System

$SB

Allocation Address

$SW

Allocation Address

System bit memory can be allocated in the PLC (host) memory area or in $B. Set the address to a multiple of 16. When $SB is allocated as host memory, the bit number is not set.

A total of 53 bits of bit memory starting from the specified address will be used as system memory.

Example: If Serial A is set to DM 00000, the correspondence with $SB is as follows:

$SB0 Serial A: DM 00000.00

$SB1 Serial A: DM 00000.01 to

$SB52 Serial A: DM 00003.04

System word memory can be allocated in the PLC (host) memory area or in $W.

A total of 39 words of word memory starting from the specified address are used as system memory.

Set the system memory update cycle and RUN signal (pulse) interval. 3 Options

$SB, $SW Update Cycle

Set the update cycle for $SB and $SW. The cycle can be set to between 1 and 256.

Intervals of RUN

Signal (Pulse)

Set the communications interval for writing RUN signals. The interval can be set to between 1 and 256.

Click the System Memory List Button to display the System Memory List.

List Button

5 Memory Card Free

Space Check Flag

Set the amount of free space on the Memory Card for which to issue an alarm. If the free space on the Memory Card inserted in the PT is at or below the amount of free space set here, $SB48 will turn ON.

7-2

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

7-1 Settings

Reference

Set internal memory for both $SB and $SW allocation addresses or set the same host address for both for them.

Example $SB: Serial A: 00000

$SW: Serial A: DM 00000

Set the same host name (Serial A) for both $SB and $SW.

TIM, CNT, TK, TU, and CU cannot be allocated for $SB.

TK, TU, and CU cannot be allocated for $SW.

Refer to

2-4 System Memory

in the

NS Series Programming Manual

for details on the system memory.

When changing the settings on the Comm-All Tab Page for whether the communications port, the

Ethernet, and Controller Link are used, close the System Setting Dialog Box before setting the host address in $SB or $SW.

$SB, $SW Update Cycle

Data is updated between $SB/$SW and the allocated addresses each time the number of communications cycles specified in the $SB, $SW Update Cycle field is processed.

Example: When the $SB, $SW Update Cycle is set to three cycles.

1 2 3

Updating

$SB/$SW

1 2 3

Updating

$SB/$SW

Communications cycle

(time for all required communications to complete one cycle.)

Communications cycle

(time for all required communications to complete one cycle.)

Reference

The $SB and $SW are also updated when a project starts loading, switching base screens, opening or closing pop-up screens, and switching frames. After updating during these operations, updating is performed according to the setting in the $SB, $SW Update Cycle field.

RUN Signal Pulse Interval

The RUN signal ($SB0, $SB1) is output after $SB and $SW are refreshed the number of times set for the RUN Signal Pulse Interval.

Example: The following illustration is for when the RUN Signal Pulse Interval is set to 3.

1

$SB and $SW refreshed

2

$SB and $SW refreshed

3

$SB and $SW refreshed

1

$SB and $SW refreshed

Communications cycle (All required communications completed once.)

RUN Signal output.

7-3

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

7-1 Settings

Initial Value for System Memory

Click the

System Memory List

Button on the Initial Tab Page to display the Initial Value for System

Memory Dialog Box.

The $SB and $SW can be set to communicate with the PLC allocation addresses set in the Initial Tab

Page.

$SB and $SW addresses are divided into functional groups, and the user can select the groups for which to perform communications. By selecting items, communications will be performed between the selected area and the PLC address.

The default setting is for only Screen (communications with $SW0). Change the settings as required.

The above setting example is set for communications as follows:

$SW0 Serial A: DM 01000

$SW10 to $SW13 Serial A: DM 01010 to DM 01013

Reference

The $SB bits and $SW words that are not selected in the Initial Value for the System Memory Dialog Box are set to not communicate with the PLC, and can be used. (When bits and words are not selected, it does not indicate that their use is prohibited.)

7-1-4 History

Click the

History

Tab.

1

2

3

4

5

7-4

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

7-1 Settings

No. Setting

1 Number of Operation Log Records

Details

Set the number of logging records to be saved in a single file. The number of records can be set to between 0 and 1,024.

Set to 0 if it is not necessary to save records.

2 Use Ring Buffer Select to record data in a ring buffer. When this setting is selected, if the maximum number of items is exceeded, the oldest data is deleted and the new data is recorded. When this setting is not selected, no more data will be recorded once the set maximum is reached.

3 Character Code for

Log File

Select the character code (ASCII or Unicode) for alarm/event histories, data logs, operation logs, and error logs.

Set the format for outputting the data log to a CSV file.

5

Format

Save the data with offset time display format

Select to display the time as an offset when outputting log data from the data log to a CSV file.

7-1-5 Comm-All

This tab page is used to set the communications destination. Click the

Comm-All

Tab.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

7-5

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

7-1 Settings

No. Setting

1 Serial Port A

Details

Select

None

,

PLC

,

Bar-Code Reader

,

Temperature Controller

,

Memory Link

, or

Modem for

Data Transfer

for the communications destination.

One bar code can be set for each project.

2 Serial Port B Select

None

,

PLC

,

Bar-Code Reader

,

Temperature Controller

,

Memory Link

, or

Modem for

Data Transfer

for the communications destination.

One bar code can be set for each project.

Communicate with an expansion interface

Select this option when using an Expansion Interface for serial communications (NS5 only).

This option is for future expansion only. Do not normally select it.

3 Ethernet

4 Controller Link

Select whether Ethernet will be used.

Disabled: Ethernet communications not used.

Enabled: Ethernet communications used.

Select whether Controller Link will be used.

Disabled: Controller Link communications not used.

Enabled: Controller Link communications used.

5 Comm. Time Out Sets the time for the timeout error when a response is not received from the host. The timeout monitor time can be set to between 1 and 10 (unit: s).

6 Retry Set the number of communications retries before an error screen will be displayed when a communications error occurs while communicating with the host. If communications are unsuccessful after the number of communications retries specified in this setting have been executed, processing set for communications auto-recovery under

Comm. Auto-return

will be executed.

The number of retries can be set to between 0 and 255 times.

7 Routing Table Setting

9 Comm. Details Button

Click the

Routing Table Setting

Button to display the Routing Table Setting Dialog Box.

Select whether or not to use communications auto-recovery.

Yes: Retries communications when a communications error occurs, without displaying the

Error Message Dialog Box.

No: Displays the Error Message Dialog Box when a communications error occurs. Click the

OK Button in the Error Message Dialog Box to retry communications.

Click this button to display a dialog box for making advanced communications settings.

Reference

To change the communications port setting, the screen data must be changed.

Example: Changing from using serial port A only to serial port B.

1. Click the

Comm-All

Tab in the System Setting Dialog Box, and change

None

to

PLC

for serial port B (leave the serial port A set to

PLC

).

The host is registered automatically under these conditions. (The default host name is Serial B.)

2. When creating functional objects that will communicate with the PLC connected to serial port B, set the host name to

Serial B

and set the address.

When changing the communications destination of the existing functional objects to the PLC connected to serial port B, change the host name from

Serial A

(default host name when using serial port A) to

Serial B

.

Functions such as

Replace

(refer to

5-4 Editing

) and

Change Settings at Once

(refer to

5-10

Batch Settings

) are useful here. Settings can be changed efficiently by using the

Import CSV File

and

Export CSV File

functions (refer to

Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files

).

When the

Import/Export CSV File

functions are used, the whole file is exported to a CSV file, after which the exported file can be opened and functions such as

Replace

can be used to change

Serial A

to

Serial B

. (Indirect addresses and other data are not included in the CSV file. The allocations for these data must be changed separately using the NS-Designer.)

3. When serial port A is not used, click the

Comm-All

Tab in the System Setting Dialog Box, and change the serial port A setting from

PLC

to

None

.

7-6

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

7-1 Settings

When the settings for whether the communications ports are used have been changed, close the

System Setting Dialog Box before setting the host address in $SB or $SW. Until the System Setting

Dialog Box is closed, the settings that existed prior to the changes are still enabled, and the new host setting cannot be specified in the system memory allocation addresses.

Setting Routing Tables

Click the

Routing Table

Button on the Comm. All Tab Page to display the Routing Table Setting Dialog

Box.

The routing tables consist of a local network table and remote network table. Routing tables are required to use messages on a Controller Link Network.

Local PT

Communications path

Communications partner

7-7

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

7-1 Settings

Local Network Table

The local network table is shown on the left side of the Routing Table Setting Dialog Box. The setting for Serial Port A, Serial Port B, Ethernet, and Controller Link Tabs are shown.

Number Setting

1

2

3

NTLK0

NTLK1

ETN

Details

Information for serial port A is shown. The unit number and local network address are fixed.

Unit number: 34

Local network address: 111

Information for serial port B is shown. The unit number and local network address are fixed.

Unit number: 39

Local network address112

Information for Ethernet is shown. The unit number is fixed.

Unit number: 17

Local network address: The number set on the Ethernet Tab

Page is shown.

4

CLK Information for Controller link is shown. The unit number is fixed.

Unit number: 18

Local network address: The number set on the Controller Link

Tab Page is shown.

Reference

Close the System Setting Dialog Box after changing the settings on the Comm-All Tab Page for whether communications ports are used, or after changing settings on the Ethernet or Controller

Link Tab Pages. The previous setting will remain until the dialog box has been closed.

7-8

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

7-1 Settings

Remote Network Table

The remote network table provides the node and network address corresponding to the initial relay point (first point the data must pass) en route to a target network (end network) not directly connected to the local PLC. The table specifies the route from the relay point to the end network.

Local PT Relay PLC (a) Relay PLC (b) Destination

Network 1

Network 2

Network 3

1

2

3

Number Setting

1

2

Destination Network

Address

Remote Network

Address

3

Gateway Node Address

Details

Set the target network address. When the target is on the local network, this setting is not required.

Set the network address of the first point on the way to the target network. When the target is on the local network, this setting is not required.

Set the node address of the first relay point on the way to the target network. When the target is on the local network, this setting is not required.

The following diagram shows an example of a system connection and its routing tables.

PT at local node

Node 1 Node 2 Node 3

Relay PLC

(a)

Node 1

Node 2

Relay PLC

(b)

Node 1

Destination

Node 2

Network 1

Network 2

Network 3

Relay Network Table for Local PT

Relay Network Table for PLC (a)

Destination network address

Relay network address

Gateway node address

Destination network address

3 1 3

Relay network address

3 2

Gateway node address

2

Relay Network Table for PLC (b)

Destination network address

Relay network address

Gateway node address

1 2 1

Relay Network Table for Destination Node

Destination network address

Relay network address

Gateway node address

1 3 1

Meaning: To go to network 3, first go to node 3 of network 1.

Meaning: To go to network 3, first go to node 2 of network 2.

Meaning: To go to network 1, first go to node 1 of network 2.

Meaning: To go to network 1, first go to node 1 of network 3.

7-9

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

7-1 Settings

Comm. Details

The Comm. Details Dialog Box will be displayed if the

Comm. Details

Button is clicked on the

Comm-All Tab page.

Set the interval of message communications, i.e., the time from starting all communications required on the screen until the next communications are started. The interval can be set to between 2 and 200 ms.

The following examples illustrate operation when the interval set here differs from the time required for actual communications.

Example: Actual Communications Longer than Set Interval

Message communications interval

(setting)

Actual communications interval

All communications are completed before starting communications again.

Example: Actual Communications Shorter than Set Interval

Message communications interval

(setting)

Actual communications interval

Communications are not started again until the set interval has expired.

7-1-6 Detailed

The advanced settings are used to set the details of the communications method selected from the Comm-All

Tab Page.

7-10

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

7-1 Settings

Serial Port A and Serial Port B

Select

PLC

or

Bar-Code Reader

under

Serial Port A

or

Serial Port B

in the Comm-All Tab Page to enable the Serial Port A Tab Page or Serial Port B Tab Page.

When Communications Destination Is Set to

PLC

:

1

2

3

No. Setting

1 Protocol

Details

Select the protocol from 1: 1 NT Link, 1: N NT Link, or Host Link.

Using both serial ports A and B Supported/not supported

1: 1 NT Link + 1: 1 NT Links

1: 1 NT Link + 1: N NT Links

1: N NT Links + 1: N NT Links

Supported

Supported

Supported

2 Comm.

3 NT Link (1: N)

Unit No.

Select the communications speed. The communications speed range depends on the protocol setting. Refer to the following table for applicable ranges.

Protocol Transfer speed selection range

1: N NT Links Normal or high-speed

1: 1 NT Link No settings

Host Link 9,600 or 19,200 bps

Select the unit number for the 1: N NT Link from 0 to 7. When a 1: 1 NT Link is selected as the protocol, this setting is not required.

7-11

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

When Communications Destination Is Set to

Bar-Code Reader

:

1

2

3

4

5

6

7-1 Settings

No. Setting

1 Data

2 Stop

3 Parity

Details

Select the data bit length for the bar code reader from 7 or 8 bits.

Select the data stop bit length for the bar code reader from 1 or 2 bits.

Select the data parity bits for the bar code reader from none, even, or odd.

Select the baud rate for communications with the bar code reader from 4,800, 9,600, or

19,200 bps.

5 BCR Select the confirmation method used after inputting data in the input column from the following options.

Auto: Automatically confirms data when it is read from the bar code reader.

Manual: Confirms data when the Enter Key is pressed. Data and character strings can be added.

6 Continuous Set whether to move focus to the next object when confirming bar code inputs. This set-

Input ting can be enabled when

BCR Input

is set to

Auto

.

Ethernet

Click the

Ethernet

Tab.

6

1

2

3

4

5

7-12

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

7-1 Settings

No. Setting

dress.

2 Node

Details

Set the network number of the Ethernet network to which the PT is connected. The number can be set between 1 and 127.

Set the node address of the PT in the Ethernet network. The address can be set between 1 and 254.

3 UDP Port No.

4 IP

IP Address

Sub-net

Mask

Default

Gateway

IP Proxy

Address

5 Conversion

Table

Set the UDP port number to be used. The number can be set between 1024 and

65535.

Set the IP address of the Ethernet to which the PT is connected.

The IP address can be set between 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.

Set the subnet mask of the Ethernet to which the PT is connected.

The subnet mask can be set between 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.

Set the IP router for communications with other networks.

The default gateway can be set between 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.

Set the IP address or IP proxy address of the transmission destination for Ethernet communications.

Set the address between 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255.

Create the conversion table converting FINS node addresses to IP addresses for

Ethernet communications. Up to 32 address combinations can be registered.

Procedure

Adding Settings

1. Click the

Add

Button to display the following dialog box.

6 LAN

2. Set the node address and the IP address to be converted to, and then click the

OK

Button. The setting range is as follows:

Node address: 1 to 253

IP address: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Editing or Deleting Settings

Select the setting to be edited or deleted.

Click the

Edit

Button or the

Delete

Button.

Select the method for setting the Ethernet speed from

10/100BASE-T Auto Switch

or

10BASE-T Fixed

.

7-13

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Controller Link

Click the

Controller Link

Tab.

7-1 Settings

1

2

3

4

5

No. Setting Details

Set the network number of the Controller Link Network to which the PT is connected. The number can be set between 1 and 127.

4 Data Link Table

Setting

Set the node number of the PT on the Controller Link Network. The number can be set between 1 and 32.

Select the baud rate from 500 Kbps, 1 Mbps, or 2 Mbps.

Click the

Data Link Table Setting

Button to display the Data Link Table

Setting Dialog Box. .Refer to page 7-14 for details.

Set whether the Controller Link Status is read and set the address to which status is read. The address can be set to between $B0 and $B 32336.

Setting Data Link Tables

Data Link tables show the way that data is linked. Data link tables can be set using Controller Link

Support Software or the CX-Net (Network Setting Tool). The data link tables can only be specified on the NS-Designer.

Click the

Data Link Table Setting

Button to display the Data Link Table Setting Dialog Box.

1

2

7-14

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

7-1 Settings

Number Details

1 Display whether the Data Link Tables exist in the folder storing the project file.

Examples: No Data Link Tables:

2

Data Link Table exists:

Used to select the Data Link Table file. A file name with extension .cl3 must be set. Click the

Browse

Button and select the Data Link Table file. The specified Data Link Table will be resaved as ClkDLink.cl3 in the project folder.

Note

Delete the data link tables from any node that is not participating in the data links.

Reference

Any file name can be set when creating data link tables using Controller Link Support Software or CX-Net. Specifying Data Link Tables in the Data Link Table Setting Dialog Box on

NS-Designer. The file will be saved as ClkDLink.cl3 in the project folder.

Data link tables can be set via a network. Set data link tables in the Controller Link I/F Unit using CX-Net or Controller Link Support Software. Data Link Tables are not set in

NS-Designer. Setting data link tables via a network can be used to change data link tables.

When setting data link tables on the NS-Designer, the data link tables cannot be changed via network. If the user attempt to change the settings of data link tables using Controller Link

Support Software or CX-Net, the settings in NS-Designer will remain. For this reason, projects and setting files must be re-transferred to the PT when changing data link tables.

Read Status

Status indicates the operating status (network status), such as error information in the Controller Link network and node participation status, and operating status (data link status). Reading the status makes it possible to check whether an error has occurred and whether the machine is operating correctly.

When any $B address within the range is set in the

Status Allocation Address

, the address will be the start address of 27 consecutive addresses to which status will be read. Refer to

the Operation Manual

Appendix 8 Details of CLK Status

for details on the allocation addresses.

7-15

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

7-1-7 Printer

Select the Printer Tab Page.

1

2

3

7-1 Settings

Number Setting

1 Printer Type

Details

Select either ESC/P Raster or BJ Raster as the printer’s control method.

2

3

Mode

Orientation

Select from the following:

Color

Monochrome

Monochrome (inverse)

Select to change the orientation of the paper.

Portrait

Landscape

7-16

Section 7 System Settings

NS-Designer Operation Manual

7-1-8 Video

Select the Video Tab Page.

7-1 Settings

1

2

3

4

Number Setting

1

2

Video Board

Color which fills blank channels

Details

Select the type of Video board to be installed in the PT. If this setting is changed, conversion processing will be executed for projects currently being edited.

Set when using an NS-CA002 RGB/Video Input Unit. If the same color set in the video display color is set for graphics such as functional objects, the part overlapping the video display objects will be displayed as a video image and other parts will be displayed in black.

Color to fill the rectangle is set to the same color as the video display.

Graphic (rectangle)

Video display object The section that overlaps the video image is displayed as a transparent image. The section outside the boundary of the video image is displayed in black.

Graphic (rectangle)

3

4

Video Input Method

Save in a file if memory card is full

Select the input method for video signals. This setting is used for all video input from the video card.

Set the action to perform if the Memory Card is full when capturing video images using system memory.

Update: If the same file name exists, delete the oldest file and save the newer file.

Stop: The file will not be saved.

7-17

Section 8 Testing

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Section 8 Testing

This section describes the test execution methods and test tool.

8-1 Test Function ................................................................................................................................................8-1

8-2 Test Tool.......................................................................................................................................................8-6

Section 8 Testing 8-1 Test Function

8-1 Test Function

The test function is used to manipulate data created on screen in the NS-Designer to check screen data operation without transferring data to the PT.

Pressing buttons, changing addresses, and operating and displaying functional objects can be tested without the PT being used.

Executing Tests

1. Save projects and screens before executing a test.

2. Select

Tools - Test

.

The Test Dialog Box will be displayed.

3. Set the options for executing the test.

1

2

No. Setting

1 Minimize

NS-Designer

Details

Select to minimize the NS-Designer during test execution.

2 Start Test from

Current Screen

Select to start the test from the screen currently at the front of the NS-Designer.

When this setting is not selected, the test will start from the Initial Screen setting in the Initial Tab Page located under Settings - System Setting.

4. Click the

Start

Button to start up the test function and start the test.

Reference

If projects and screens are not saved before a test is executed, a dialog box will be displayed confirming whether to save data when

Tools - Test

is selected. Save data before executing a test.

Test Screen

The test screen and test tool is started up when a test is executed. The test screen is first displayed with the set screen size.

Test screen

Test tool

8-1

Section 8 Testing 8-1 Test Function

Switching Screen Display and Style

By double-clicking a position on the test screen where no function is located, the screen display and style can be switched using the following procedure. The settings can also be switched from the

View Menu.

Show title bar, hide menu bar

Hide title bar, hide menu bar

Full screen display

Hide title bar, show menu bar

Show title bar, show menu bar

Selecting a Screen

Select

File - Select page

, and display the required screen by selecting it from the Select Page

Dialog Box.

Function List

The functions in each menu of the test screen are as follows:

File Menu

Menu item

Select Project

Select Screen

Exit

Select the project to be tested.

Select the screen to be displayed.

Exit the test.

Function

View Menu

Menu item

Title

Menu

Full Screen

Function

Select whether to display or hide the test screen title bar.

Select whether to display or hide the test screen menu bar.

Switch the test screen to full screen display mode.

Option Menu

Menu item Function

Input mode

Caption mode

Select the input mode for Numeral Display & Input and String Display & Input from keypad or external device (such as keyboard).

While external device is selected, the menu item is displayed with a check mark.

Select whether to display labels or show addresses.

(This function is the same as that selected under the NS-Designer

View - Show

Address

.)

While

Show Address

is selected, the menu item is displayed with a check mark.

About product information Displays information on the product.

Reference

Addresses are not displayed for data block tables.

Exiting Tests

Ends the test screen and test tool.

1. Use one of the following operations to end the test.

Select

File - Exit

.

Click the Button at the top right of the window.

Double-click the test mode icon at the top left of the window.

8-2

Section 8 Testing 8-1 Test Function

Click the test mode icon at the top left of the window, and select

Close

from the Control Menu

Box that is displayed.

Press the Alt + F4 Keys.

2. A dialog box confirming whether to exit the test will be displayed. Click the

Yes

Button to exit the test.

Reference

When the menu bar is not displayed in the test screen, double-click on the test screen until the menu bar is displayed.

Test Restrictions

The following restrictions apply to testing. The tests operate differently from PT operations.

1 Changing Date and Time

Date and time settings cannot be changed when using the test function, even if a new date or time is input using the date and time functional objects.

2. Flicker Display Color

When flicker is performed in test mode, the inverse display color may differ from the color displayed at the PT.

3. $SB and $SW Operations

In test mode, operations can be checked for the following system memory bits and words only.

When checking operations, change the $SB and $SW values directly.

Changes to other system memory values will not be processed.

Offset

+19

+33

+36

+38

+39

+40

+41

+45

+46

+47

+52

$SB

Details

Prohibit Input

Save Alarm/Event History

Save Data Log

Save Operation Log

Log Functional Object Operation

Log Switch Screen Operation

Log Macro Operation

Macro Error Dialog Control

Notification of Macro Error

Logging Process Error Flag

Data Block Operation Complete Flag

+8

+9

+10

+13

+18

+19

+20

+21

+23

+24

+25

+26

Offset

+0

+1

+2

+3

+4

+5

+6

+7

$SW

Details

Current Screen No.

Current Pop-up Screen 1 No.

Position of Pop-up Screen 1 (X)

Position of Pop-up Screen 1 (Y)

Current Pop-up Screen 2 No.

Position of Pop-up Screen 2 (X)

Position of Pop-up Screen 2 (Y)

Current Pop-up Screen 3 No.

Position of Pop-up Screen 3 (X)

Position of Pop-up Screen 3 (Y)

Current Label No.

Password No. for Canceling Input Prohibition

No. of Alarms/Events Occurred

Occurred Alarm/Event ID

Cancelled Alarm/Event ID

Alarm/Event ID of Alarm/Event Object Macro

Macro Error No.

Screen Number Having Macro Error

Object ID Having Macro Error

Macro Timing Having Error

8-3

Section 8 Testing 8-1 Test Function

Offset

$SB

Details Offset

+27

+28

+29

+30

+31

+32

+33

+34

+35

+36

+37

+38

$SW

Details

Offset Value for Index 10

Offset Value for Index 11

Offset Value for Index 12

Offset Value for Index 13

Offset Value for Index 14

Offset Value for Index 15

Offset Value for Index 16

Offset Value for Index 17

Offset Value for Index 18

Offset Value for Index 19

Data Log Group Number

Data Block Error Number

4. $SB and $SW Address Allocations

Communications are not performed between allocated addresses and $SB or $SW.

For example, when communications are set between $SW0 and DM 00000:

Even if the value of $SW0 is changed, DM 00000 will not change.

Even if the value of DM 00000 is changed, $SW0 will not change.

The format of the following input dialogs is different from that used by the PT.

Each type of keypad displayed when inputting Numeral Display & Input.

Each type of keypad displayed when inputting String Display & Input.

Date Setting Dialog Boxes displayed when inputting date settings.

Time Setting Dialog Boxes displayed when inputting time settings.

Password Input Dialog Boxes and virtual keyboards that are displayed when inputting passwords.

Also, the PT can display two types of keypads (with and without a temporary input), but in test mode only the keypads without a temporary input can be displayed.

6. Video Display Object

Video images are not displayed in test mode. The display area for a video display will be gray-out instead. The display will also be different if other objects overlap the video display object or a dialog box is displayed.

PT: The video display object will be displayed on top and any objects overlapping it will not be displayed. The video display object will disappear temporarily if an error dialog box, write confirmation box, etc., is displayed. The video image will return when the dialog box is closed.

Test mode: Function objects are display on top of the video display object.

7. Command Buttons

The following command button functions will not work in test mode.

Video controls - Video capture

Video controls - Contrast adjustment

Video controls - Vision Sensor Console output

Pop-up menus for word buttons, command buttons, and text display and input objects will be different from those on the PT.

PT: A scroll bar will appear on the right of the menu when there are more than 10 items on the menu.

Test mode: All menu items will be displayed at the same time even if there are more than 10 items.

8-4

Section 8 Testing 8-1 Test Function

9. Log Data File for Data Log

In test mode, only one log data file will be saved for each group. On the PT, up to 999 log data files will be saved for each group. If, however, the output file name that is set is 6 characters or longer, only up to 99 log data files will be saved. The log data file names are as shown in the following table.

PT/Test mode Log data file names Details

PT Trd#

.CSV (default) # : 00 to 99, indicating data log groups 1 to 100.

: 001 to 999. The largest current number will be incremented by 1 to when the data is saved.

Test mode Trd#.CSV (default) # : 0 to 99, indicating data log groups 1 to 100.

10. Reading/Writing Data Block Data Files

Reading and writing data block files is different.

PT: The read/write location for data files can be set to either the PT or the Memory Card

(only when display a confirmation dialog box is set).

Test mode: The read/write location for data files cannot be set and the operation is performed directly on the CSV data file set for the

Register Data Block

. To test writing a data file, make a CSV data file backup in advance to transfer to the PT.

Refer to

2-16 Data Blocks

in the

Programming Manual

for details.

11. Displaying Data Block Table Data

Operation is different when editing data block tables.

PT: Even if values are edited in the data block table, the previous values will be displayed after the screen is switched unless the data file is written.

Test mode: Values edited in the data block table will be displayed after the screen is switched even if the data file is not written. The data file must be read to return to the previous values.

Refer to

2-16 Data Blocks

in the

Programming Manual

for details.

12. System Language

The system language cannot be changed in test mode. The language set for the OS of the computer will be displayed.

8-5

Section 8 Testing 8-2 Test Tool

8-2 Test Tool

The test tool is used to display a list of addresses set in the functional objects, and to change address values and monitor address status without actual communications being performed with external devices.

Executes each menu bar test tool function.

Displays the current address values.

The addresses set for the functional objects of the currently displayed screen are displayed in sorted order. For each new screen displayed, the addresses set for the functional objects of the screen are added to the display.

8-2-1 Display Formats

The test tool can be used to switch the display as follows:

Changing Display

The display format of addresses can be selected from the following five settings.

Decimal (signed)

Octal

Decimal (unsigned)

Binary

Hexadecimal

Procedure

Select the display format from

View - Display

.

Select the format from the Display Format Combo Box.

Display Contents

Select the address displayed in the test tool from the following 3 options.

Bit device (bit addresses only)

Word device (word addresses only)

All (all addresses set in the functional object)

Procedure

Select the display contents from

View - Contents

.

Select the display contents from the Contents Combo Box.

Reference

The display format and contents can also be switched from the pop-up menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button in the address list field.

8-6

Section 8 Testing 8-2 Test Tool

8-2-2 Setting Values

Use the following procedure with the test tool to change address values set in functional objects.

Select the address to be changed and double-click on it or click the

Set Value

Button.

Double-click the selected item or click the

Set Value

Button.

The Set Value Dialog Box will be displayed.

Bit Addresses

Click the

SET

Button to write 1 to the address.

Click the

RESET

Button to write 0 to the address.

Word Addresses

Input the value to be written and then click the

OK

Button.

The symbol will change to for the address that has had a value changed.

Reference

Set

Display

to

Hexadecimal

to input BCD formats.

Example:

To input –12 as BCD1 (1-word, signed (most significant digit: F)), input F012.

If

Display

is not set to

Hexadecimal

, input the value converted to the required display format.

Example:

To input –12 as BCD1 (1-word, signed (most significant digit: F)), input the converted value –4,078 in INT.

Refer to

2-8 Common Functional Object Functions

in the

NS Series Programming Manual

for details on storage formats.

The values can also be set from the pop-up menu that is displayed by clicking the right mouse button in the address list field.

8-7

Section 8 Testing 8-2 Test Tool

Always on Top

The setting for whether to display the test tool on top can be switched under

Options

-

Always on Top

.

While the setting for displaying the test tool on top is selected, the menu item will be displayed with a check mark.

Reference

The default setting is for the test tool to be always displayed on top.

8-8

Section 9 Validation

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Section 9 Validation

This section explains the functions used for checking that screen data is correct and displaying a list of errors, based on the validation settings.

9-1 Validation Settings .......................................................................................................................................9-1

9-2 Validation Results.........................................................................................................................................9-2

9-3 List of Validation Items ................................................................................................................................9-4

Section 9 Validation

NS-Designer Operation Manual

1. Select

Tools - Validation

.

2. The Validation Dialog Box will be displayed.

Set each item and then click the

OK

Button.

1

9-1 Validation Settings

2

No. Setting

1 Check When

After pressing OK button

Select the range for executing the validation from either the front screen page only or the whole project.

Details

Set the range and timing for executing validation.

Click the

OK

Button in the Validation Dialog Box to execute the validation.

Before saving screens

Open error screen after validation

2 Check

When saving a screen, validation is executed before the screen is saved. Validation is executed for the front screen only.

Select this setting to display detected errors after the validation has been completed.

Select the items to be checked for errors.

Refer to

9-3 List of Validation Items

for details.

Reference

Even if the

Detect incorrect address

item is selected and

Current Screen

is selected for the range, addresses for the following items will not be checked. If

Whole Project

is selected for the range and the

Detect Incorrect Address

item is executed,

Jump

cannot be performed from the validation result to the following addresses.

Flicker settings; Data log settings; System settings; Alarm/event settings; Data block settings; Project Properties - Macro; Screen Properties - Macro

9-1

Section 9 Validation

NS-Designer Operation Manual

9-2 Validation Results

9-2-1 No Error Detected

When Validation Is Performed with

After pressing OK button

Selected:

The following dialog box will be displayed after executing validation.

9-2 Validation Results

When Validation Is Performed with

Before saving screens

Selected:

The screen will be saved after executing validation. A dialog box is not displayed when this method is used.

9-2-2 Error Detected

The Validation Result Dialog Box is displayed after executing validation.

Displays information for objects that were detected with errors.

Executes validation again and displays the most recent data.

Select the error from the validation results and click the

Jump

Button, or double-click on the selected line. The corresponding object or screen will be displayed. When the error occurred in an object, boxes

( g

) will flash.

Select and click the

Jump

Button or double-click on the selected line.

The black squares will flash.

9-2

Section 9 Validation

NS-Designer Operation Manual

9-2 Validation Results

Reference

The Validation Result Dialog Box will remain open until the

Close

Button or the Close Button ( at the top right of the dialog box is clicked.

The Validation Result Dialog Box can be reopened after closing by selecting

Tools - Validation

Result

or clicking the

Validation Result

Button.

Toolbar

)

9-3

Section 9 Validation

NS-Designer Operation Manual

9-3 List of Validation Items

9-3 List of Validation Items

Error No. Item

1

2

3

Detect incorrect addresses

Detect unset addresses

Check if a screen switch object exists on each screen

Details

Checks whether the address formats are incorrect or whether the addresses are set outside the specified range. Alarm/event, data log, data block, and system memory allocation addresses, however, are not checked.

Searches for functional objects and frames that have not been allocated addresses.

Checks whether screen switch objects operated by Command Buttons exist on each screen.

5

6

8

Check if screen switch destination exists

Check if specified files

(bmp/txt etc.) exist

Checks whether the screen switch destination specified by the screen switch command button exists.

Checks whether files (BMP files, JPEG files, TXT files, or LST files) set in functional objects exist in the screen folder. The screen folder is a folder located one level below the project file. The folder is automatically created with the same name as the project.

Checks whether the positions of functional objects are overlapping.

9

10

Detect overlapping functional objects

Check if functional objects are created inside screen/frame area

Check if touch points are included in functional objects

Checks whether objects are positioned in areas that are not displayed when the PT is running, or whether the objects in frames are positioned outside the frame area.

Checks whether the functional objects are positioned above the touch points. When used to check pop-up screens, this setting is used to detect functional objects that have a width or height that is smaller than the mesh size of the touch panel. The touch panel mesh size is

16

×

16 dots for NS12, NS10, and NS5, and 20

×

20 dots for NS8.

9-4

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Section 10 Transferring Data

This section explains how to transfer screen data that has been created or edited to and from the PT, and how to retrieve registered data from the PT.

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT....................................................................................................................................... 10-1

10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card ....................................................................................................... 10-29

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA..................................................................................................................................... 10-33

Note: Do not perform the following operations while downloading or uploading project data or the system program. The data may be damaged.

Turn OFF the power to the PT.

Press the PT reset switch.

If project data or the system program is damaged by turning OFF the power when writing files, it may not be possible to replace the system program using a normal data transfer. If project data is damaged, format the screen data areas using the system menu of the PT. Refer to

6-2-1 Screen Data Area Format

in the

NS

Series Setup Manual

for details on formatting screen data areas. Refer to

3-6-3 Transferring Data with

Memory Cards – Errors

in the

NS Series Setup Manual

to replace the System Program.

Do not download a system program earlier than version 6.2 to an NS5-V2 PT. Refer to

3-6-3Transferring

Data with Memory Cards – Errors

in the

NS Series Setup Manual

for information on updating and recovering the system program.

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

There are two methods for transferring data between a PT and the NS-Designer (personal computer):

Transferring data to the PT

Transferring data to a Memory Card inserted into the PT.

These methods can be used in the following cases.

Transferring data to the PT

Transferring data to a Memory Card inserted into the PT.

Installing the System in the PT.

Transferring a project, screen data, and setting file to the PT.

Transferring the project data stored in the PT to the personal computer.

Transferring data to a Memory Card.

Transferring the data stored in the memory card (data logs, alarm histories, data blocks, etc.) to the personal computer.

Deleting files stored on the Memory Card.

Creating/Deleting folders.

Memory Card

Download

Upload

Transferring data using a Memory

Card inserted into the computer running NS-Designer and the PT.

Files

Creating folders remotely

System

Project

Screens

Setting files

Alarm histories

Data logs

Data blocks

Operation log

Captured data

PT

Data transfer between computer (NS-Designer) and PT.

System

Projects

This section describes transferring data to the PT. Refer to

10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Mem-

ory Card

to transfer data to a Memory Card.

10-1

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

10-1-1 Preparations and Procedures before Connecting

The preparations and procedures for downloading data created on the NS-Designer to the PT, and uploading data from the PT to the NS-Designer are described below. To transfer the data between the

PT and NS-Designer (personal computer), select the method of transfer and make settings to transfer the data beforehand.

Transfer Methods

Six communications methods can be used to transfer data between the PT and NS-Designer, as shown in the following table. Select the appropriate method depending on the distance between the PT and NS-Designer, or the features of each transfer method.

Communications method

Serial cable

PT model

All models

Required devices

Exclusive cable

Features

Transfers screen data by connecting cable between the PT and personal computer. The length of the cable is 2 m, so the distance between personal computer and PT is limited.

Ethernet is faster than using serial cable and can cover greater distances. In addition, screen data can be transferred via a network.

Ethernet NS12-TS01-V1 Twisted-pair

NS10-TV01-V1 cable

NS8-TV01-V1

NS8-TV11-V1

NS5-SQ01-V1

NS5-SQ01-V2

NS5-TQ01-V2

NS5-MQ01-V2

Modem

Controller

Link

USB

All models

NS12-TS00-V1

NS12-TS01-V1

NS10-TV00-V1

NS10-TV01-V1

All models (See note.)

Special cable for analog modem

Controller Link

Support

Board, Controller Link

Interface Unit, twisted-pair cable

USB cable

Remote data transfers are possible via phone lines using a modem.

Data transfers can be performed to PT connected to a

Controller Link network via a Controller Link Support

Board mounted in a computer.

Memory Card All models Memory Card interface on the personal computer

Connecting the personal computer and PT with a USB cable enables faster screen transfer than serial connections.

First, store the data from the NS-Designer in a Memory Card. Then, transfer the data from the Memory

Card to the PT. Refer to

3-6 Using Memory Card

s in the

NS Series Setup Manual

for details on transferring data using a Memory Card.

Note: Support varies for the NS-V1 Series PTs and the PT system program version. Refer to

3-3-2 Connecting via USB

in the

Setup Manual.

10-2

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

Preparations Required for Data Transfer

Connecting via Serial Cable

To transfer data, connect the personal computer and PT with a cable. Connect the RS-232C port on the computer to the tool connector on the PT using a cable. Refer to

2-2 Part Names and Functions

in the

NS Series Setup Manual

for the location of PT connectors. Refer to

Appendix 6 Preparing Cables for Computer Connection

in the

NS Series Setup Manual

for details on preparing the cable.

Transfer method

Serial Cable Connection

Recommended cable

Model: XW2Z-S002 (2 m long) manufactured by OMRON

(D-Sub 9-pin Male

D-Sub 9-pin Female)

Reference

Log in as the administrator when transferring data via a serial connection using NS-Designer Ver.

5.X or earlier installed on Windows NT, 2000, or XP.

Connecting via Ethernet

To transfer data, connect the personal computer and PT with a cable. Connect an Ethernet port on the computer to the Ethernet connector on the PT using a cable. Refer to

2-2 Part Names and Functions

in the

NS Series Setup Manual

for the location of PT connectors. Refer to

Appendix 6 Preparing Cables for Computer Connection

in the

NS Series Setup Manual

for details on preparing the cable.

Transfer method

Ethernet Connection

Recommended cable

Twisted-pair straight or crossed cable (10/100Base-T)

Reference

Log in as the administrator when transferring data via an Ethernet connection using NS-Designer

Ver. 5.X or earlier installed on Windows NT, 2000, or XP.

PT Settings before Transferring Data via Ethernet

The first time data is transferred to the PT via Ethernet, it is necessary to set the network address, node address, and IP address beforehand. Make the following settings on the

System Menu –

Comm.

Tab Page.

Item Setting

Network Address Set the Ethernet network address.

Node Address Ensure that the PC and PT settings are not the same.

IP Address Set the same network ID (the underlined parts in the example below) and set the node address as the host ID (the last part of the IP address).

Setting Example

Network address: 1

Ethernet

Twisted-pair cross cable

NS-Designer

Node address: 1

IP address: 192.168.1.1

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

PT

Node address: 2

IP address: 192.168.1.2

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

10-3

Section 10 Transferring Data 10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Refer to

6-6-4 Setting Ethernet

in the

NS Series Setup Manual

for details on making settings, such as the IP Address, at the PT.

Reference

With NS-Designer Ver. 2.X and earlier versions, data must be transferred via serial cable or Memory Card before transferring data via Ethernet. This is not necessary with Ver. 3.X or later versions.

10-4

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

Preparations for Transferring Data via Modems

To transfer data, connect the PT and the computer running NS-Designer via cables and modems. Refer to the operation manual for the modem for modem settings.

Settings before Transferring Data via Modems

Make the following settings when connecting the computer to a modem and transferring data over telephone lines to a PT connected via a modem.

PT Settings

The baud rate must be set before transferring screen data to a PT connected via modems. Set the serial port to be used to a modem connection on the

System Menu – Comm.

Tab Page, click the

Details

Button and set the following items.

Baud rate

Data bits

Stop bits

Parity

Item Setting

Set the baud rate between the modem and PT to 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200.

The number of data bits (length) is always 8 bits.

The number of stop bits (length) is always 1 bit.

The parity bit setting is always

None

.

System Configuration Example

Serial Phone line Serial

Modem Modem

PT

NS-Designer

Reference

When using a project created with system version 5.X or lower, select

Settings - Conversion -

Project -to Ver. 6.0

from the NS-Designer and convert to system project version 6 before making the settings.

10-5

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

Connecting the PT to a Modem

After completing the modem settings, connect the PT to the modem. Use the following connection diagram as reference and connect the PT to the modem.

D-sub 25-pin connector (male)

D-sub 9-pin connector (male)

Modem

PT

Connector hood (FG)

FG

1

Shield

Connector hood (FG)

1

FG

SD

RD

RS

2

3

4

2

3

4

SD

RD

RS

CS

SG

5 5

9

CS

SG

DR

7

6 7

DR

ER

20 8

ER

Preparations for Transferring Data via Controller Link

The following hardware is required to transfer data via Controller Link.

PT

Computer

Name Model

Computer Link Interface Unit

(See note 1.)

NS-CLK21

3G8F5-CLK21 Controller Link Support Board for

ISA Bus (See note 2.)

Controller Link Support Board

(See note 3.)

3G8F7-CLK21

Twisted-pair Cable ESVC0.5X2C to in the

NS Series Setup Manual

(Cat. No. V083) for information on mounting and wiring the NS-CLK21 Controller Link Interface Unit.

2. Refer to the

Controller Link Support Boards Operation Manual

(Cat. No. W307) for information on mounting and setting the NS-CLK21 Controller Link Support Board for ISA Bus.

3. Refer to the

Controller Link Support Boards for PCI Bus Operation Manual

(Cat. No. W383) for information on mounting and setting the NS-CLK21 Controller Link Support Board for PCI Bus.

Settings before Transferring Data via Controller Link

PT Settings

The following settings must be made from the NS-Designer before transferring screen data to a PT connected via Controller Link. After the settings have been made, they are transferred to the PT along with any screen data without using the Controller Link.

1. Select

– System Settings – Comm – All

from the NS-Designer.

2. Set to

Use.

the Tab and make the following settings. Set the network address of the

Controller Link to which the PT is connected. The setting range is from 1 to 127.

4. Set the node address to the node address of the PT in the Controller Link network. The setting range is from 1 to 32.

5. Set the baud rate to 500 Kbps, 1 Mbps, or 2 Mbps. the Button.

10-6

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

7. Transfer the settings along with any screen data from the personal computer to the PT without going through the Controller Link network.

Preparations for Transferring Data via USB

Data can be transferred by connecting the PT and the computer running the NS-Designer with a USB cable. The USB port on the computer is connected to the USB slave connector on the PT. Refer to

2-2

Part Names and Functions

in the

NS Series Setup Manual

for the location of the connector on the PT.

Reference

To transfer via USB, the USB driver for data transfer to the PT must be installed in the computer. Refer to

2-2 Installing the NS-Designer

for the installation procedure.

For an NS-V1 Series PT, confirm that the lot number of the PT supports USB transfer and that the system software version installed in the PT supports USB transfer. Refer to

3-3-2 Connecting via USB

in the

Setup Manual

for details.

Preparations for Transferring Data Using a Memory Card

Data can be saved on a Memory Card from the NS-Designer on the computer and then transferred to the PT from the Memory Card. The Memory Card is inserted into the memory card connector on the PT.

Refer to

3-6 Using Memory Cards

in the

NS Series Setup Manual

for details on transferring data using a Memory Card. Refer to

Appendix 9 List of Optional Products

in the

NS Series Setup Manual

for information on the Memory Cards and Memory Card Adapters that can be used.

Data Transfer Types

The following data can be transferred.

Projects Project data

Screen data

System program

All project data, consisting of screen data and setting file.

Screen data only. Does not contain setting file.

A system program is necessary to operate the PT using communications or to change font sizes. It is only used for special occasions, such as replacing the current system program or recovering system operation.

OK

OK

OK

NO

OK OK

Reference

If the version of system program in the PT older than the version of the screen data, project data, screen data, and setting files cannot be transferred. Refer to

Appendix 9 Converting Data between

Different Versions of NS-series Products

.

Perform PT system recovery if the system in the PT becomes corrupted or needs to be updated.

Refer to

3-6-3 Transferring Data with Memory Cards

Errors

in the

NS Series Setup Manual

for system recovery and update procedures.

10-7

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

Data Transfer Flow

To transfer data to PT, follow the steps given below.

Start transfer program.

Refer to the following sections

Project data:

10-1-3 Transferring Project Data

Screen data:

10-1-4 Transferring Screen Data

OLE_LINK2

System program: Refer to

10-1-5 Transferring the System Program

.

Set communications.

Refer to

10-1-2

Communications Settings for

NS-Designer

Select the project.

Entire project

Screen data

Set communications.

Refer to

10-1-2

Communications Settings for

NS-Designer

Select the system program.

Execute transfer.

Restart PT.

10-8

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

Procedure for Transferring Data

Use the following procedure to transfer data to the PT. In this section, only an outline of the procedure is provided. The actual step may differ depending on the type of data being transferred. For details, refer to

10-1-3 Transferring Project Data, 10-1-4 Transferring Screen Data,

and

10-1-5

Transferring the

System Program

.

1. Click and select

Transfer Data

, or click the Windows Start Button and select

Programs

-OMRON - NS-Designer - Screen Data Transfer

.

The Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box will appear.

1

4

5

2

3

No. Item

1. Select All

Contents

Specifies all screen data and the setting file stored in a project.

3.

Update Clicking this button will automatically select the screen data with different modification

Screen dates between the computer and PT or Memory Card. It is convenient to repeatedly edit and transfer screen data. If this button is not pressed, the updated screen will not be selected.

List Boxes for

NS-Designer and

NS-Series/ Memory Card

The screen numbers, screen names, and modification dates are displayed. The icons displayed on the left have the following meanings.

Icon Meaning

Indicates new screen data.

Indicates modified screen data.

Indicates old screen data.

None Indicates data that is the same between the computer and PT.

4

5

Connect

Cancel

Click this button to connect the computer and PT.

Click this button to disconnect the computer and PT.

10-9

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

1. Select

Select Project

from the

Mode

Menu on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.

2. Click the

Select Project

Button, and then select a project. (This step is necessary only to send a

specific project. The default selection is the project data that is currently being created. Usually it is

not necessary to select a project.)

3. Select the communications method. For details, refer to

10-1-2 Communications Settings for

NS-Designer

.

4. Click the

Connect

Button. The computer and PT will be connected.

Computer PT

5. The screen data stored in selected project is displayed in both list boxes.

Select the items (whole project/screen/setting file) that you want to transfer to the PT.

Computer PT

6. Click the Button to transfer data from the computer to the PT or a Memory Card.

Click the Button to transfer data from the PT or Memory Card to the computer.

10-10

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

When uploading, a dialog box will be displayed to specify where the project should be saved. For details, refer to

10-1-3 Transferring Project Data

.

7. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the

Start

Button to start the transfer.

8. If any of the following items differ between the source and destination, a warning message will be displayed.

PT Model

System Version

Language

Messages will show information about the source and destination.

Click the

Yes

Button to continue with the transfer.

9. When transferring data to a Memory Card is finished, a message that the upload/download has been completed will be displayed. Refer to

3-6 Using Memory Cards

in the

NS Series Setup Manual

for the procedure to transfer data from a Memory Card to the PT.

If data transfer is performed via a serial cable, modems, Ethernet, or Controller Link, the following screen will be displayed on the PT while transferring the data.

Screen Display on PT

Progress displayed.

Transfer File Name

Reference

The maximum file size for transferring is 1.44 Mbytes.

If you attempt to transfer data exceeded 1.44 Mbytes, the following message will be displayed and data transfer will be aborted.

Check the size of files such as BMP files, and after changing or deleting data, execute the transfer again.

10-11

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

10. When the data transfer has been completed, a screen indicating so will be displayed on the PT and a confirmation dialog box for restarting the PT will be displayed on the computer. If

Auto-reset after the transmission

is selected in the Comms Method Dialog Box, the PT will be automatically reset without displaying the confirmation dialog box.

Screen Display on PT

11. Click the

Yes

Button to restart the PT.

If you click the

No

Button, the screen will return to Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, and data can be transferred again.

Even if you click the

No

Button, a confirmation dialog box to restart the PT will be displayed again when you exit the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. If the

Yes

Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the

No

Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. If the

Cancel

Button is clicked, the window will return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.

10-12

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Screen Display on PT

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

The transferred screen is displayed.

Reference

If a communications error occurs or the PT cannot read the transferred data normally and an error occurs, perform data transfer again from the beginning.

10-13

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

10-1-2 Communications Settings for NS-Designer

Use the following procedure to set the communication methods between the NS-Designer and PT.

Procedure

1. Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. the Button.

The Comms. Method Dialog Box will be displayed.

1

3

4

No. Setting

1 Comms.

Method

2 Set

Details

Select the method of communications with the PT: Ethernet, Serial, Memory Card,

Serial (Modem), USB, or CLK (Controller Link).

Make settings for the communications method selected in 1, above. Refer to the setting procedure given for each method later in this section.

3 Drive

4 Bank

When a Memory Card is selected as the communications method, specify the drive where the Memory Card is inserted.

When a Memory Card is selected as the communications method, select the bank to be used. A bank refers to a collection of system files and screen data. Banks 1 to 4 can be stored in a Memory Card.

5 Auto-reset after the transmission

Set whether the PT is to be automatically reset when a transfer is completed for

Ethernet, Serial, Modem, Controller Link, or USB communications. the Button. The dialog box will be closed and the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box will return. the Button in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. After the connection is established, the PT will automatically switch to the following window and go into transfer-wait state.

10-14

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

Reference

Check the following items if the connection is not established.

Are the cables connected properly?

Is the PT turned ON? Is the startup message that is displayed directly after turning ON the power displayed?

Note

When transferring data using Ethernet or Controller Link, data can be sent to other nodes on the network unintentionally, so always select the node carefully.

Detailed Communications Settings

Serial Communications

1

2

1

No. Setting

Port ing Time

Details

Select the COM port on the computer to use to communicate with the PT.

Set the response monitoring time. Increase the time only when there are frequent communications errors.

10-15

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Ethernet Communications

1. Make the following settings on the

Network

Tab Page.

1

2

3

4

5

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

2

3

4

Address

FINS Destination

Address

Frame Length out

Network

Node

-

Details

Set the network address of the Ethernet network to which the computer is connected.

Set the network address of the Ethernet network to which the PT is connected.

Set the node address of the PT.

Set the maximum frame length. Use the default setting.

Set the response timeout time. Increase the time only when there are frequent communications errors.

2. Make the following settings on the

Driver

Tab Page.

1

2

3

4

1

No.

2

3

4

Field

Workstation

Node Number

-

Item

IP Address

Port Number

-

-

Auto-detect

Details

The workstation node number can be input if the

Auto-detect

option is not selected. If automatic detection is not used, the node and IP address must be input on the conversion table on the Ethernet Tab Page in the

System Settings.

Select this option to automatically generate the node address of the computer from the IP address. If automatic detection is used, the node and IP address do not need to be input on the conversion table on the Ethernet Tab Page in the

System Settings.

Example: If the IP address of the computer is 192.168.0.10, the node address of the computer will be automatically set to 10.

Set the IP address of the PT to be connected.

Set the UDP port number. Normally 9600 can be used.

10-16

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Controller Link Communications

1. Make the following settings on the

Network

Tab Page.

1

2

3

4

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

1

No.

2

3

Field

FINS Destination Address

Frame length

Timeout

Item

Network

Node

-

Details

Set the network address of the Controller Link network to which the PT is connected.

Set the node address of the PT.

Set the maximum frame length. Use the default setting.

Set the response timeout time. Increase the time only when there are frequent communications errors.

2. Make the following settings on the

Driver

Tab Page.

5

6

4

1

2

3

1

No.

NSB

Field

2

3

4

5

6

Board Type

Network Address

Item

Shared RAM

Address

Interrupt Level

Baud Rate

-

Node

Unit

Details

Set to the same value as the DIP switch on the Controller Link

Support Board.

Set to the same value as the jumper pins on the Controller Link

Support Board.

Set the baud rate to 500 Kbps, 1 Mbps, or 2 Mbps.

Set the Controller Link Support Board type to

ISA

for an ISA

Board or to

PCI

for a PCI Board.

Set the local node address of the Controller Link Support Board.

Set the unit number of the Controller Link Support Board between 16 and 31.

10-17

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Modem Communications

1. Make the following settings on the

Network

Tab Page.

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

1

No. Field

timeout

Item Details

Set the response timeout time. Increase the time only when there are frequent communications errors.

2. Make the following settings on the

Modem

Tab Page.

The settings on the Driver Tab Page do not need to be made if the following settings are made on the Modem Tab Page.

1

2

3

4

5

No. Field Item

1 Modem -

Details

Select the modem driver. Click the

Configure

Button to display the Modem Property Dialog Box.

Set the location of the local modem. 2 Current - tion

3 Connect To Country Code

4

5

Area Code

Telephone

Number

Set the country code of the destination modem, even when communicating within the same country.

Set the area code of the destination modem, even when communicating within the same area.

Set the phone number of the modem to which to connect.

10-18

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

3. Click the Button on the

Modem Tab

Page and set the modem properties.

Setting Example

Set the following items on the

General

Tab Page.

1

2

1

2

No. Field on General Tab Page

Data connection options

Item Details

Port speed

Flow control

Set the baud rate of the modem.

This item enables or disables flow control. Disable flow control.

Make the following settings on the

Advanced

Tab Page.

1

2

3

1

2

3

No. Field on Details Tab Page

Hardware settings

Item Details

Data bits

Parity

Stop bits

Set the data length to 8 bits.

Set the parity to “none.”

Set 1 stop bit.

Reference

If the option to Auto-reset after the transmission is selected, the PT will be automatically reset and the phone line will be disconnected after transfer has been completed.

10-19

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

USB Communications

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

No. Setting

1 Response monitoring time

Details

The monitoring time for receiving a response.

Increase this time only if there are excessive communications errors.

10-1-3 Transferring Project Data

Use the following procedure to transfer all data for a selected project to the PT or a Memory Card.

Procedure: Downloading Project Data

1. Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.

2. Select from the

Mode

Menu or right-click on the Transfer Data Dialog Box and select

Select Project

from the pull-down menu. the Button and select the project. (The default selection is the project data currently being edited by the NS-Designer. Normally, selecting the project is not required.)

Reference

When transferring screen data that is being edited, save the screen data before transferring. If the data is not saved before transferring, the most recently saved data will be transferred and unsaved editing will be lost from the transfer data. the Button and set the communications method. Refer to

10-1-2 Commu-

nications Settings for NS-Designer

for details. the Button. The computer will be connected to the PT.

6. Click at the top of the

NS-Designer

Box. All the screens stored in the project will be selected.

10-20

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

7. Click the Button to display the confirmation dialog box and then click the

Start

Button to start downloading the data. When using a Memory Card to transfer data, this will complete the transfer process. Steps 8 and 9 are not required.

The transfer progress will be displayed at the PT and in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.

8. When an automatic reset after transfer has not been set, the following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The PT must be restarted to run the project that has been transferred. Click the

Yes

Button to restart the PT.

If the wrong project data has been transferred, the procedure can be executed again from step 2 without restarting the PT by clicking the

No

Button. if

No

Button is clicked, the following confirmation dialog box to restart the PT will appear after Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box is closed. If the

Yes

Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the

No

Button is clicked, you will have to restart the PT manually. If the

Cancel

Button is clicked, the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box will return.

Reference

When data is transferred, any of the following history data that was previously recorded in the PT will be deleted.

- Alarm History

- Data Log

- Operation Log

- Error Log

- Internal holding areas ($HB and $HW), only portions used by the Smart Active

Parts.

Sheet numbers are displayed as follows on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog

Box:

Sheet 0

Sheet 1

4095

4094

Sheet 5

Sheet 6

4090

4089

Sheet 2

Sheet 3

Sheet 4

4093

4092

4091

Sheet 7

Sheet 8

Sheet 9

4088

4087

4086

Procedure: Uploading a Project

Use the following procedure to transfer data stored in the PT or on a Memory Card to the NS-Designer.

1. Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.

2. Select

Select Project

from the

Mode

Menu or right-click on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box and select

Select Project

from the pop-up menu.

10-21

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

3. Click the

Comms. Method

Button and set the communications method. For details, refer to

10-1-2

Communications Settings for NS-Designer

. the Button. The computer will be connected to the PT.

5. Click the Button. The Save as Dialog Box will be displayed. Specify the project name under which to save the uploading data, and click the

Save

Button.

6. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the

OK

Button. Uploading will start.

The transfer progress will be displayed at the PT and in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.

7. When an automatic reset after transfer has not been set, the following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The PT must be restarted to operate the screens that have been transferred. Click the

Yes

Button to restart the PT. Click the

No

Button to continue downloading data. if

No

Button is clicked, the following confirmation dialog box to restart the PT will appear after Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box is closed. If the

Yes

Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the

No

Button is clicked, you will have to restart the PT manually. If the

Cancel

Button is clicked, the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box will return.

10-22

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

Reference

When uploading data, only the whole project can be transferred. Transferring separate screens is not possible.

The contents of system setting on the NS-Designer cannot be uploaded.

10-1-4 Transferring Screen Data

Individual screen data stored in the selected project can be transferred to PT or Memory Card.

Procedure

1. Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box

2. Select

Select Project

from the

Mode

Menu or right-click on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box and select

Select Project

from the pop-up menu.

3. Click the

Select Project

Button and select the project. (The default selection is the project currently being edited by the NS-Designer. Normally, selecting the project is not required.)

Reference

When transferring screen data that is being edited, save the screen data before transferring. If the data is not saved before transferring, the most recently saved data will be transferred and any unsaved changes will be lost in the transfer data.

4. Click the

Comms. Method

Button and set the communications method. For details, refer to

10-1-2

Communications Settings for NS-Designer

. the Button. The computer will be connected to the PT.

6. Select the screen data to transfer from the list box for the NS-Designer. Click the

Select Update

Screen

Button to automatically select only screen data with different modification dates between the computer and PT or Memory Card.

10-23

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

Display screens with different dates.

7. Click the Button. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed.

8. Click the

Start

Button. The download will be started.

Reference

When you select

File - Save All

on the NS-Designer, the modification dates for all screens will be changed. Therefore, if the

Select Updated Screen

Button is clicked, all screens will be selected, not just updated screens.

When choosing multiple screens at the same time, select screens while pressing the Ctrl Key. To select a range of screens, select the screens while pressing

The Shift Key. To cancel selection, click the screens again while pressing the

Ctrl Key.

When transferring the data, the following data will be deleted.

-

-

-

-

-

Alarm History

Data Log

Operation Log

Error Log

Internal holding areas ($HB and $HW), only portions used by the Smart Active Parts.

If the project name read by the data transfer program and the project name stored in the PT are the same, only screen data will be transferred even if the contents of the two projects are different. Always confirm data contents when transferring only screen data.

The transfer progress will be displayed at the PT and in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.

9. When an automatic reset after transfer has not been set, the following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The PT must be restarted to run the project that has been transferred. Click the

Yes

Button to restart the PT.

Click the

No

Button to return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, and downloading can be performed again.

10-24

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

Even if the

No

Button is selected, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. If the

Yes

Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the

No

Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the Screen

Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the

Cancel

Button.

If a communications error occurs or the PT cannot read the transferred data normally and an error occurs, perform data transfer again from the beginning.

Sheet numbers are displayed as follows on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog

Box:

Sheet 0 4095 Sheet 5 4090

Sheet 1

Sheet 2

Sheet 3

Sheet 4

4094

4093

4092

4091

Sheet 6

Sheet 7

Sheet 8

Sheet 9

4089

4088

4087

4086

10-1-5 Transferring the System Program

A system program is necessary to operate PT for communications or to change font sizes. It is only used for special occasion, such as replacing the system program or recovering system operation.

Procedure: Downloading the System Program

1. Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.

2. Select

Select System

from the

Mode

Menu or right-click on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box and select

Select System

from the pop-up menu.

3. Click the

Select System

Button and select the folder named

bank1

. The folder named

bank1

is in the

System Backup – NS12_V1/NS10_V1/NS8_V1/NS5_V1_V2 – V6_2 folder

under the

NS-Designer installation folder. Refer to

2-2 Installing the NS-Designer

for details on directories. the Button and set the communications method. For details, refer to

10-1-2

Communications Settings for NS-Designer

. the Button. The computer will be connected to the PT.

10-25

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

6. Click the Button. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed.

7. Click the

Start

Button. The download will be started.

The transfer progress will be displayed at the PT and in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.

8. The following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The

PT must be restarted to run the project that has been transferred. Click the

Yes

Button to restart the PT. the Button to return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, and downloading can be performed again.

Even if the

No

Button is clicked, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. If the

Yes

Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the

No

Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the Screen

Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the

Cancel

Button.

10-26

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

If a communications error occurs or the PT cannot read the transferred data normally and an error occurs, perform data transfer again from the beginning.

If the system program is transferred to the PT, the screen data in the PT will not be deleted. When transferring the system program, match the version of system program and project data before operating the PT.

If the PT system is destroyed or requires updating, perform the PT system recovery operation. Refer to

3-6-3 Transferring Data with Memory Cards

in the

NS Series Setup Manual

for the procedures to recovery and updating.

Procedure: Uploading the System Program

Use the following procedure to transfer the data stored in the PT or Memory Card to the NS-Designer.

1. Display the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.

2. Select from the

Mode

Menu or right-click on the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box and select

Select System

from the pop-up menu. the Button and set the communications method. For details, refer to

10-1-2

Communications Settings for NS-Designer

. the Button. The computer will be connected to the PT.

5. Click the Button. The Save as Dialog Box will be displayed.

6. Specify the project name under which to save the data, and click the

Save

Button.

7. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the

OK

Button. The upload will be started.

The transfer progress will be displayed at the PT and in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.

8. The following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The

PT must be restarted to run the project that has been transferred. Click the

Yes

Button to restart the PT. Click the

No

Button to return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, and downloading can be performed again.

10-27

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-1 Transferring Data to the PT

Even if the

No

Button is selected, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. If the

Yes

Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the

No

Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the Screen

Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the

CANCEL

Button.

If a communications error occurs or the PT cannot read the transferred data normally and an error occurs, perform data transfer again from the beginning.

10-28

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card

10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card

This section explains preparations and procedures to transfer data between a Memory Card inserted into PT and the NS-Designer (personal computer).

10-2-1 Preparations for Transferring to a Memory Card in PT

To transfer data between a Memory Card inserted in the PT and the NS-Designer, select the transfer method, and make the settings beforehand.

Transfer Methods

There are five methods to transfer data between a Memory Card inserted in PT and the NS-Designer:

Serial cable

Ethernet

Modems

Controller Link

USB

Connect the PT and NS-Designer (personal computer) using either of these methods and transfer the data. Refer to

10-1-1

Preparations and Procedures before Connecting

for the features of these methods and the required cables.

Before Connecting

To transfer data between a Memory Card and the NS-Designer (personal computer) using serial, modem, Ethernet, Controller Link, or USB communications, settings on the PT are required. Refer to

10-1-1 Preparations and Procedures before Connecting

and make settings for FinsGateway.

Transfer Methods

The following operations can be performed between a Memory Card and the NS-Designer.

Memory Card

NS-Designer Transferring files stored in a Memory Card.

NS-Designer

Memory Card Transferring files stored in the computer.

Deleting files stored in a Memory Card

Creating folders in a Memory Card

Deleting folders in a Memory Card

10-29

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card

Data Transfer Flow

Use the following steps to transfer the data between a Memory Card and the NS-Designer.

Start Memory Card transfer.

Set communications.

Transfer data.

NS-Designer → Memory Card in the PT

Memory Card in the PT

NS-Designer (Computer)

10-30

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card

10-2-2 Procedure for Transferring Data to a Memory Card in the PT

Use the following procedure to transfer data between a Memory Card inserted in the PT and the

NS-Designer (personal computer).

1. Click the Windows

Start

Button and select

Programs - OMRON – CX-One - NS-Designer -

Memory Card Transfer

.

2. The Memory Card Transfer Dialog Box will be displayed.

5

6

1

2

3

4

7

Number Item

1

2

Connect Button

Cancel Button

Contents

Connects the computer to the PT.

Disconnects the computer from the PT.

3

4

Comms.Method Button Displays the Comms Method Dialog Box.

Displays the next-higher folder.

Deletes the files selected in the File List.

If the selected folder is empty, the folder will be deleted. If the selected folder is not empty, an error message will appear and the folder will not be deleted.

Creates a new folder.

5

6

7

Look in:

File List

Displays where the file is placed.

“/” indicates the root folder in the Memory Card.

Displays the files and folders that are in the folder as a list.

Selecting, transferring, and deleting the files or folders can be performed.

Downloads the selected files or folders from the file list of NS-Designer to the

Memory Card inserted in PT.

Uploads the selected files or folders from the file list of the Memory Card to the computer.

10-31

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-2 Transferring Data to and from a Memory Card

Reference

The following action on the PT may be delayed while transferring the data using the Memory card.

- Key press actions

- Updating number values and character strings

- Time for displaying a screen

3. Click the

Comm. Method

Button to select communications method.

(1)

Number Item Contents

Selects the communications method to Ethernet, Serial, Modem, Controller Link, or USB.

4. Set the communications method and then click the

OK

Button. the Button on the Memory Card Transfer Dialog Box.

When the connection has been made, the file list will be displayed for the Memory Card.

Reference

If the connection is not completed, an error message will be displayed. Click the

Connect

Button again after checking the following items.

- Communications Method

- Node Address

- Cable Connection

6. Select the files or folders from the file list in the Memory Card Transfer Dialog Box to execute the transfer, deletion, and creation of new folders.

10-32

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

10-3-1 Overview of SPMA

Data from other devices can be accessed from an application on a computer by going through the networks. This is referred to as SPMA (Single Port Multi Access). When transferring screen data from the NS-Designer, users can send it to the PT through a PLC connected with the PT by a Serial,

Ethernet, or Controller Link network.

When transferring/monitoring data, such as a ladder program, from the CX-Programmer, users can also send it to the PLC through the PT connected with the PLC by a Serial, Ethernet, or Controller Link network.

Be sure to confirm safety at the destination PT before transferring screen data. In particular, before transferring data using SPMA, be sure to confirm the network address, node address, and unit number.

10-3-2 SPMA Features

Transferring Data from the Computer to the PT through a PLC or a Memory

Card in the PT

Screen data can be uploaded/downloaded from the NS-Designer to/from a PT connected by serial,

Ethernet, or Controller Link communications through the PLC (CS/CJ-series PLCs only) connected with the PT by a Serial, Ethernet, or Controller Link network. In addition, the data can be downloaded/uploaded to a Memory Card placed in the PT.

Ethernet/Controller Link

Serial (Tool bus) or modem

CS/CJ-series PLC

NS-Designer

PT

Computer

Serial 1:N NT Link

Ethernet/Controller Link

PT

10-33

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

Transferring/Monitoring Ladder Programs via a PT

Data, such as a ladder program, can be uploaded/downloaded from the CX-Programmer to a PLC connected by a Serial or Controller Link network through a PT connected with the PLC by an Ethernet network.

NS-Designer NS-Designer

Ethernet

Controller Link

1:N NT Link 1:N NT Link

PT PT

PLC PLC

Ethernet

Controller Link

PLC PLC

The CX-Net cannot be used when using the CX-Programmer through the PT.

Updating screen display and responses of touch input actions may slow down when using the

CX-Programmer through the PT.

Correct operation is possible only for the configurations described in this manual.

10-3-3 System Configuration

Transferring Screen Data from the NS-Designer to a PT through a PLC

Screen data can be transferred from the NS-Designer to the PT as shown below. Procedures are different depending on the configuration.

Comms.Setting

Computer-PLC PLC-PT

Screen Data

Details

NS-Designer

Serial (Tool Bus/modem)

CPU Unit

Serial, 1:N NT Links

See P10-36.

Serial COM

Modem

Serial

CS/CJ-series

PLCs (Relay)

Ethernet/Controller Link

See P10-39.

Serial COM

Modem

Ethernet or

Controller Link

Ethernet/Controller Link

CPU Unit

Serial, 1:N NT Links

See P10-44.

Ethernet

Controller Link

Serial

Ethernet/Controller Link

See P10-49.

Ethernet

Controller Link

Controller Link

* Cables must be connected to the built-in RS-232C port or peripheral port on the PLC’s CPU Unit by a serial 1:N NT Link. To make settings for the expansion routing tables (routing tables that treat serial communications as Network communications), CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or later is required

.

To transfer screen data to a PT through a PLC, one of the following CPU Units (Lot No. 030201 and later) is required. CPU Units and lot numbers not listed in the following table do not support this function.

10-34

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

PLC series

CJ Series

CS Series

CPU Unit

CJ1H-CPU65H

CJ1H-CPU66 H

CJ1G-CPU42 H

CJ1G-CPU43 H

CJ1G-CPU44 H

CJ1G-CPU45 H

CJ1M-CPU11

CJ1M-CPU12

CJ1M-CPU13

CJ1M-CPU21

CJ1M-CPU22

CJ1M-CPU23

CS1H-CPU63H

CS1H-CPU64 H

CS1H-CPU65 H

CS1H-CPU66 H

CS1H-CPU67 H

CS1G-CPU42 H

CS1G-CPU43 H

CS1G-CPU44 H

CS1G-CPU45 H

CS1D-CPU42S

CS1D-CPU44S

CS1D-CPU65S

CS1D-CPU67S

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

Lot number

030201 and later

To send screen data to a PT through a PLC that is connected with a PT by a Serial network, the PT must be connected to the built-in RS-232C port or peripheral port on the PLC’s CPU Unit. The screen data cannot be transferred to a PT connected with the RS-232C port on a Serial Communications

Board or a RS-422A/485 port of the PLC.

When connecting the PLC and PT by a Serial network (1:N NT Links), set

NT Link Max

on the

Settings

– Host Link Port

Tab Page in the CX-Programmer to a value greater than 1.

Before transferring screen data from the NS-Designer to a PT that is connected by a Serial network

(1:N NT Links) through the PLC, confirm that

High Speed

is

ON

under

Option

Pass Through PLC

Settings

of the

Screen Data Transfer

tool.

10-35

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

Transferring/Monitoring Data, such as a Ladder Program, from the

CX-Programmer to a PLC through a PT

The following configuration allows transferring and monitoring a PLC from the CX-Programmer.

CX-Programmer/

NS-Designer

Ladder program, etc.

Ethernet

*

Serial 1:N NT Links

PT (Relay)

Controller Link

CX-Programmer/

NS-Designer

Controller Link

*

PT (Relay)

Serial 1:N NT Links

Ethernet

* Cannot transfer/monitor data, such as a ladder program, passing through the PT when the computer

(CX-Programmer) is connected to the PT using serial communications, a modem, or a USB cable.

CX-Programmer/

NS-Designer

Ladder program, etc.

Serial

(Toolbus/Modem), USB

Serial 1:N NT Links

Cannot pass through the PT

PT (Relay)

Controller Link

10-3-4 Procedural Example

To explain details of settings simply, procedures are described as tutorial with examples depending on the configuration. The values such as IP Addresses, Network Addresses described below are the examples so please set those in accordance with the actual environment.

Serial Connection between Computer and PLC and Serial 1:N NT Link between PLC and PT Set for Transferring Screen Data to a PT through a PLC.

This section describes data transfer from the NS-Designer to a PT connected either an RS-232C port or a peripheral port on the PLC’s CPU Unit by a Serial (1:N NT Link) connection through a PLC connected with the computer by serial (Peripheral bus) connection. In this example, the cable between the computer and the PLC is connected to the peripheral port on the PLC and the cable between the PLC and the PT is connected to the RS-232C port on the PLC.

10-36

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

PT

Screen Data

NS-Designer

Serial (Tool bus)

Communications Method between computer and PLC:

Serial COM

Serial (1:N NT Links)

Communications Method between PT and PLC:

Serial

Settings on the PLC

It is not necessary to make settings when connecting using the above system configuration.

Settings on the PT

It is not necessary to make settings when connecting a PLC with a PT by serial 1:N NT Link communications. For information on connection methods for 1:N NT Links, refer to

Section 4 Connecting the

Host to Serial Port

in the

NS series Setup Manual

.

Setting the Communications Method

1. Open the desired project on NS-Designer and select

File - Screen Data Transfer

. The Screen data

Transfer Dialog Box will appear. the Button on the top right of the dialog box. The Comms.Setting Dialog

Box will appear.

3. Select Pass Through PLC option.

4. Select the communications method between computer and PLC. Here,

Serial (Toolbus)

is set as an example.

5. Select the communications method between PLC and PT. Here,

NT Link

is set as an example.

Select when transferring data via a PLC.

Select communications method between the computer and PLC. (Serial (Toolbus) is selected as an example.)

Select the communications method between the PLC and PT. (Here, NT

Link is selected as an example.) the Button to the right of the communications method setting. The following

Serial Setting

Dialog Box will appear.

10-37

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

(1) Set the COM port to use to connect the computer and PLC.

(2) Set the baud rate between the computer and PLC.

(3) Set whether to detect the baud rate between the computer and PLC.

(4) Input the response monitor time.

Increase the time only when there are frequent communications error.

1

2

3

4

Port

Baud rate

Set the COM port to use to connect the computer and PLC.

Set the baud rate between the computer and PLC to 9600, 19200, 37400,

57600, or 115200.

Detect baud rate Set whether to detect the baud rate set for the peripheral port on the PLC.

The default is to detect the baud rate. If detection is disabled (pin 4 on the

PLC’s DIP switch is turned ON), set the baud rate in 2, above, to the same speed as set for the peripheral port on the PLC.

Response monitor time Input the response monitor time. Increase the time only when there are frequent communications error. the to the COM port to use to connect the computer to the PLC. Here

COM1

is set as and example. the Button in the Serial Setting Dialog Box. the Button on the right of the

NS

and

PLC

Field.

Enter the port to use to connect the PT and PLC.

Enter the unit number of the destination

PT set for the NT Link (1:N).

10. Set the port to use to connect PLC and the unit number of the PT that will be the destination. Here, the unit number is set to 0 because the cable is connected to the RS-232C port with a 1:1 connection.

11. Click the Button in the Serial Setting Dialog Box.

12. Click the Button in the Comms Method Dialog Box.

Transferring Screen Data

the Button in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. After completing the connection, the screen on the PT switches to the following screen and the PT will wait for the data to be transferred. Here, the entire project will be transferred as an example.

10-38

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

2.

Check

Select All,

and click the button to display the Transfer Confirmation Dialog Box.

the Button. The download will be started.

4. The following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The

PT must be restarted to operate the screens that have been transferred. Click the

YES

Button to restart the PT. Click the

NO

Button to continue downloading data.

Even if the

NO

Button is selected, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.

If the

YES

Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the

NO

Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the

Cancel

Button.

Serial Connection between a Computer and a PLC and Ethernet between a PLC and a PT Set for Transferring Data to the PT through the

PLC

This section describes an example of the settings used when transferring screen data from the

NS-Designer to a PT connected by Ethernet through a PLC connected with the computer by a serial

(toolbus) connection.

10-39

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Screen Data

Serial (Toolbus)

Ethernet

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

Ethernet Settings

Ethernet Unit Setting

Node Address

IP Address

Unit Number

6

192.168.0.6

1

Node Address

IP Address

Ethernet network address

22

192.168.0.22

3

Settings on the PLC

Create the following routing table entry using CX-Net of CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or later and transfer the routing tables to the PLC.

1. Input the unit number of the Ethernet Unit. Here,

1

is input.

2. Input the network address of the Ethernet Unit. Here,

3

is input.

Turn OFF pin 5 on the DIP switch on the PLC’s CPU Unit when connecting a device other than a computer running the CX-Programmer (such as a PT or host computer).

Turn ON pin 5 when connecting a computer running the CX-Programmer.

10-40

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

Settings on the PT

Make the settings on the NS-Designer shown below. After completing these settings, transfer them to the PT along with the screen data.

1. Select on the NS-Designer.

2. Set to

Enable

. the Tab and make the following settings.

Set the same IP address as that of the PT. Here,

192.168.0.22

is set as an example.

4. Set the subnet mask of the PT. Here,

255.255.255.0

is set as an example. the Button to display the IP Address Setting Dialog Box.

Set the same Node Address and IP Address as those set in the Ethernet Unit. Here,

6

is set for

Node Address and

192.168.0.6

is set for the IP Address as examples. the Button.

7. Transfer the settings with the screen data to the PT. To do this, connect the PT with the computer directly and perform standard data transfer. Do NOT transfer the data through the PLC.

Setting the Communications Method

1. Open the desired project on the NS-Designer and select

File

-

Screen Data Transfer

.

The Screen

Data Transfer Dialog Box will appear. the Button on the top right of the dialog box. The

Comms.Setting

Dialog

Box will appear.

4. Select the communications method between the computer and PLC. Set

Serial (Toolbus).

5. Select the communications method between PLC and PT. Set

Ethernet

.

10-41

Section 10 Transferring Data 10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Make sure to select when transferring data through a PLC.

Select the communications method between the computer and PLC, (Here, Serial

(Toolbus) is selected as an example.)

Select the communications method between the PLC and PT. (Here, Ethernet is selected as an example.) the Button on the right of the communications method setting. The following Serial

Setting Dialog Box will appear.

(1) Set the COM port to use to connect the computer and PLC.

(2) Set the baud rate between the computer and PLC.

(3) Set whether to detect the baud rate between the computer and PLC.

(4) Input the response monitor time.

Increase the time only when there are frequent communications error.

1

2

3

Port

Baud Rate

Set the COM port on the computer to use to connect the computer and

PLC.

Set the baud rate between the computer and PLC to 9600, 19200, 34700,

57600, or 115200.

Baud Rate Auto-Detect Set whether to detect the baud rate set for the peripheral port on the PLC.

The default is to detect the baud rate. If detection is disabled (pin 4 on the

PLC’s DIP switch is turned ON), set the baud rate in 2, above, to the same speed as set for the peripheral port on the PLC.

Time frequent communications error.

7. Set the Port to the COM port to use to connect the computer to the PLC. Here

COM1

is set as an example. the Button in the Serial Setting Dialog Box. the Button on the right of the

NS and PLC

Field. The Ethernet Setting Dialog Box shown below will be displayed.

10-42

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

10. Set the Network Address between the PT and PLC (the value set in the local network table using

CX-Net). Here, 3 is set as the Network Address for Ethernet communications.

11. Set the Node Address of the destination PT for the

Node Address

. Here, the node address of the

PT is input. Here, 22 is set as an example.

12. Click the Button in the Ethernet Setting Dialog Box.

13. Click the Button in the Comms Method Dialog Box.

Transferring Screen Data

the button in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. After completing the connection, the window will switch to the following window. Here, the entire project will be transferred as an example.

2. Select

,

and click the button to display the Transfer Confirmation Dialog Box. the Button. The download will be started.

4. The following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The

PT must be restarted to operate the screens that have been transferred. Click the

YES

Button to restart the PT. Click the

NO

Button to continue downloading data.

Even if the

NO

Button is selected, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when

10-43

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box.

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

the Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the

NO

Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the

Cancel

Button.

Ethernet between a Computer and a PLC and Serial 1:N NT Link between the PLC and a PT Set for Transferring Screen Data to the PT through the PLC

This section describes data transfer from the NS-Designer to a PT connected with either the RS-232C port or peripheral port in the PLC by a Serial connection through a PLC connected by Ethernet.

Screen Data

NS-Designer

PT

Communication Method between computer and

PLC: Ethernet

Communication Method between PT and PLC: Serial

NS-Designer

IP Address on the computer

Network

Address

Node

Address

192.168.0.10

1

10

Ethernet Unit Setting

IP Address

Local

Network

Address

Node

Address

Unit No.

192.168.0.6

1

6 (rotary switch)

1 (rotary switch)

Serial Setting

Network Address for Serial

Communications

NT Link unit number of the PT

3

0

Routing Table Setting

Local Network Table

Unit No.

1 (Unit No. of the Ethernet Unit)

252: RS-232C Port

253: Peripheral Port

1

3

Local Network

Address

Settings on the PLC

Set the IP Address of the PLC Ethernet Unit (hardware or software setting) and Node Address (rotary switch setting).

For instance, set values as follows:

IP Address: 192.168.0.6

Network Address: 1

Node Address: 6

Refer to the

Chapter 9 Ethernet Connection- Setting an Ethernet Unit

in the

Tutorial Manual

for details on settings.

1. Create the routing tables using CX-Net in CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or later and transfer them to the

10-44

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

PLC. Create the local network table treating either the RS232-C port or peripheral port as the

Communications Unit by setting the items shown below.

Connecting the PT with the PLC Using the RS-232C Port

Treat the RS-232C port as the Communications Unit. Set 252 for the SIOU, and set 3 for the Local

Network of the serial communications that pass through this unit number.

Unit Number

252 (serial port)

Local Network Address

3

Connecting the PT with the PLC by the Peripheral Port

Treat the peripheral port as the Communications Unit. Set 253 for the SIOU, and set 3 for the Local

Network of the serial communications that pass through this unit number.

Unit Number

253 (peripheral port)

Local Network Address

3

2. Add the Local Network Table for PLC Ethernet Unit in the same manner.

Set 1 for the SIOU and 1 for Local Network.

Unit Number Local Network Address

1 1

Settings on the PT

There is no need to make settings when connecting a PLC with a PT by Serial (1:N NT Link) connection.

Setting the Communications Method

1. Open the desired project on the NS-Designer and select

File

-

Screen Data Transfer

. The Screen

Data Transfer Dialog Box will appear. the Button at the top right of the dialog box. The

Comms.Setting

Dialog

Box will appear.

3. Select .

4. Select the communications method under

Computer

. Here,

Ethernet

is set.

5. Select the communications method between the PLC and PT. Set

NT Link

under

NS and PLC

.

10-45

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Select this option to transfer through the PLC.

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

Set the communications method between the computer and PLC.

Select the communications method between the

PLC and PT. the Button to the right of the communications method setting. The following Network

Setting Dialog Box will appear.

Set the Ethernet network address.

Set the network address and node number of the PLC’s Ethernet Unit.

Input the response monitor time.

Increase the time only when there are frequent communications error.

7. Input the Ethernet network address for the

Network

of the FINS source address. Here,

1

is set as an example.

8. Input network address and node number of the PLC’s Ethernet Unit for the

Network

and

Node

of the FINS destination address. Here,

1

is set for the

Network

and

6

is set for the

Node

as an example.

9. Click the

Driver

Tab and make the following settings.

10-46

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

Set the IP address of the PLC’s

Ethernet Unit.

10. Input the IP address of the PLC’s Ethernet Unit. Here,

192.168.0.6

is set for the

IP Address

as an example.

11. Click the Button in the Network Settings Dialog Box.

12. Click the Button on the right of the

NS and PLC

Field. The Serial Setting Dialog Box shown below will be displayed.

Set the serial communications network address

(the value set for the local network table in the

CX-Net) between the PT and PLC.

Input the unit number of the PT that is the target of the 1:N NT Link.

13. Set the serial communications network address (the value set for the local network table in the

CX-Net) between the PT and PLC. Set 3 as the Serial communications network address.

14. Set the unit number of the destination PT. Here, 0 is set because the RS-232C port is connected

1:1.

15. Click the Button in the Serial Setting Dialog Box.

16. Click the Button in the Comms Method Dialog Box.

10-47

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

Transferring Screen Data

the Button in the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. After completing the connection, the screen on the PT switches to the following screen and the PT will wait for the data to be transferred. Here, the entire project will be transferred as an example.

2. Select , and click the Button to display the Transfer Confirmation Dialog Box. the Button. The download will be started.

4. The following dialog box will be displayed at the computer when the data transfer is finished. The

PT must be restarted to operate the screens that have been transferred. Click the

YES

Button to restart the PT. Click the

NO

Button to continue downloading data.

Even if the

NO

Button is selected, the confirmation message shown below will be displayed when exiting the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box. the Button is clicked, the PT will be restarted. If the

NO

Button is clicked, it will become necessary to restart the PT directly. To return to the Screen Data Transfer Dialog Box, click the

Cancel

Button.

10-48

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

Ethernet between a Computer and a PLC and Controller Link between a PLC and a PT Set for Transferring Data to the PT through the PLC

Screen Data

NS-Designer

PT

Communication method between computer and

PLC: Ethernet

Communication method between PT and PLC: Controller Link

NS-Designer IP

Address on the computer

Network Address

Node Address

192.168.1.0

1

0

Ethernet Unit Setting

IP Address

Local Network

Address

Node Address

Unit No.

192.168.0.6

1

6 (rotary switch)

1 (rotary switch)

Controller Link Unit Setting

Network Address for

Controller Link

Communications

3

Node Address 4

Unit Address 2

PT Setting

Network Address

Controller Link Unit

Node Address

3

5

Routing Table Setting

Local Network Table

Unit No.

Local Network

Address

1 (Unit No. of the

Ethernet Unit)

2 (Unit No. of the

Controller Link Unit)

1

3

Settings on the PLC

1. Set the IP Address of the PLC Ethernet Unit (hardware or software setting) and Node Address

(rotary switch setting).

For instance, set values as follows:

IP Address: 192.168.0.6

Network Address: 1

Node Address: 6

Note: Refer to the

Chapter 9 Ethernet Connection- Setting an Ethernet Unit

in the Tutorial Manual for details on settings.

2. Set the Node Address and Network Address of the PLC Controller Link Unit.

For instance, set values as follows:

Node Address: 4

Network Address: 3 to (W309) for details on settings.

3. Create the following routing table using CX-Net in CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or later and transfer it to the PLC.

Unit Number Local Network Address

Ethernet Unit

Controller Link Unit

1

2

1

3

10-49

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

Settings on the PT

Make the settings on the NS-Designer shown below. After completing these settings, transfer them to the PT along with the screen data.

1. Select in NS-Designer.

2. Set to

Enable

and click the

Routing Table Setting

Button. The Routing Table

Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.

3. Input 1 as the

Destination Network Address

, 3 as the

Remote Network Address

, and 4 as the

Gateway Node Address

(Controller Link Unit’s node address). Click the

OK

Button to return to the

System Setting Dialog Box.

4. Transfer the above settings along with any desired screen data to the PT. At this time, connect the

PT directly to the computer. Perform normal screen transfer without selecting

Pass Through PLC

.

Setting the Communications Method

1. Open the desired project on the NS-Designer and select

File

-

Screen Data Transfer

. The Screen

Data Transfer Dialog Box will appear.

10-50

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

the Button at the top right of the dialog box. The

Comms.Method

Dialog

Box will appear.

3. Select .

4. Select the communications method under

Computer

. Here,

Ethernet

is set.

5. Select the communications method between the PLC and PT. Here,

CLK

(Controller Link) is set.

Select this option to transfer through the PLC.

Select the communications method between the computer and PLC.

Select the communications method between the PLC and PT. the Button to the right of the communications method setting. The following Network

Setting Dialog Box will appear.

Set the Ethernet network address

Set the network address and node number of the PLC’s

Ethernet Unit.

Input the response monitor time.

Increase the time only when there are frequent communications error.

7. Input the Ethernet network address for the

Network

of the FINS source address. Here,

1

is set as an example.

8. Input network address and node number of the PLC’s Ethernet Unit for the

Network

and

Node

of the FINS destination address. Here the network address is set to

1

and the node number is set to

6

as examples. the Tab and make the following settings.

10-51

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

Set the IP address of the

PLC’s Ethernet Uniti.

10. Input the IP address of the PLC’s Ethernet Unit. Here,

192.168.0.6

is input as an example.

11. Click the Button in the Network Setting Dialog Box.

12. Set the Network Address between the PT and PLC (the value set in the local network table using

CX-Net). In this example, 3 was set as the Network Address for Controller Link communications and so set 3.

13. Set the Node Address of the destination PT. In this example, set the Node Address of the PT’s

Controller Link Unit, i.e., set 5.

Set the Controller Link communications network address (the value set for the local network table in the CX-Net) between the PT and PLC.

Set the unit number of the PT that will be the destination.

14. Click the Button.

10-52

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

Transferring Data, such as a Ladder Program, from CX-Programmer to a PLC through a PT

Transferring Data, such as a Ladder Program, from a Computer to a PLC through a PT Connected to the Computer via Ethernet and Connected to the PLC via Serial 1:N NT Link

Ladder program, etc.

Ethernet

Serial 1:N NT Links

IP Address:

192.168.0.10

Node Address: 22

IP Address:

192.168.0.22

Network Address: 1

Settings on the PT

Go to the

System Menu

-

Comm

Tab Page. Press the

Enable

Button under

Ethernet

to display settings on the right side of the screen. Set these items in the way shown in the following table.

It is also possible to make the following settings in the NS-Designer’s system settings, and transfer them together with any desired screen data beforehand.

Item Setting

Network address 1 (network address between the computer and PT)

Node address

IP address

Subnet mask

IP address (of computer)

22 (PT’s node address)

192.168.0.22 (PT’s IP address)

255.255.255.0

192.168.0.10

Settings on the PLC

It is not necessary to make settings when connecting a PLC with a PT by serial communications (1:N

NT Link).

Settings on the Computer

1. Start up CX-Programmer. Then, set the IP address of the PT in the

IP Address

on the

Network Settings

-

Driver

Tab Page.

2. Click the Tab and set the items in the table below.

FINS Source Address

FINS Destination Address

Node

Item Setting

Frame Length

Set the local network address of the PT.

Connection via serial port A: 111

Connection via serial port B: 112

Here, 10 is set as an example.

Here, 1000 is set as an example.

Response Timeout Default value is 2.

10-53

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

Reference

The node set from the

Network

Tab Page is fixed at 1. Transfer will not be performed correctly if another number is set. Be sure to set 1.

3. After completing the settings, establish online connection and transfer the data (e.g., ladder program).

The following example shows how to perform settings for transferring data, such as a ladder program, from CX-Programmer, via a PT connected via Ethernet, to a PLC connected via Controller Link.

Ladder program, etc.

Ethernet Controller Link

IP Address:

192.168.0.10

IP Address:

192.168.0.22

Node Address: 22

Controller Link Unit’s

Node Address: 5

Network Address: 1

Controller Link Unit’s

Node Address: 4

Controller Link Unit’s

Unit Number: 2

Network Address: 3

Settings on the PT

Perform the following settings with NS-Designer.

1. Select on the NS-Designer.

2. Set and

Ethernet

to

Enable

, click the

Controller Link

Tab, and make the following settings.

Set the network address for Controller

Link communications between the PT and PLC.

Set the unit number for the PT’s

Controller Link Unit.

10-54

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

the Tab and make the following settings.

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

4. Set the network address between the computer and NS-Designer as the network address. In this example,

1

is set.

5. Set the PT’s node address as the node address. In this example,

22

is set.

6. Set the IP address set for the PT as the IP address. In this example,

192.168.0.22

is set.

7. Next set the subnet mask. In this example,

255.255.255.0

is set.

8. Next, click the

Add

Button at the bottom left of the dialog box to display the IP Address Setting

Dialog Box. In this example, the node address and IP address set for the PT and computer are set. the Button.

10. Transfer the above settings together with any desired screen data to the PT.

Settings on the PLC

Start up CX-Programmer. Connect the computer directly to the PLC. Create the following routing table and transfer it to the PLC.

SIOU (unit number of the PLC’s Controller

Link Unit)

Item Setting

2

Local Network

Remote Network

Relay Network

Relay Node

3

1

3

5

10-55

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

Settings on the Computer

Start up CX-Programmer.

1. Set the IP address of the PT in the

IP Address

on the

Network Settings

-

Driver

Tab Page. the Tab and make the following settings.

FINS Source Address – Network (between computer and PT)

Item Setting

1

FINS Destination Address – Network (between PT and PLC)

3

Node 4

10-56

Section 10 Transferring Data

NS-Designer Operation Manual

10-3 Data Transfer Using SPMA

3. After completing the settings, establish online connection and transfer the data (e.g., ladder program).

Transferring Ladder Programs

Refer to the manual for the CX-Programmer for details on transferring ladder programs.

10-57

Section 11 Printing

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Section 11 Printing

This section describes functions provided for printing.

11-1 Printing Project Information ....................................................................................................................11-1

11-2 Printing Page Information........................................................................................................................11-4

11-3 Previews...................................................................................................................................................11-8

11-4 Outputting to an RTF File........................................................................................................................11-9

11-5 Headers and Footers...............................................................................................................................11-10

11-6 Margins..................................................................................................................................................11-12

Section 11 Printing 11-1 Printing Project Information

11-1 Printing Project Information

Project information can be printed. The information that can be printed is given below.

Information Details

Screen Title List

Sheet Title List

Prints a list of screen titles.

Prints a list of sheet screen titles.

Alarm Setting List

Unit & Scale List

Password Setting

System Data (Labels, System Setting)

Prints a list of registered alarms and events.

Prints a list of registered numeric units and scales.

To print only registered items turn ON

Print Set Item Only.

Prints a list of registered passwords.

Prints a list of label switch names and system settings.

1. Select

File - Print

.

2. The Print Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the

Project Information

Tab.

3. Select the information to be printed.

1

2

3

5

4

No. Item

1

Include Select the information to be printed.

Details

2

3

4

5

Printing Items List Lists the items selected in No. 1, above.

Print to File

Inverse Print

Preview Button

Outputs the selected items to an RTF (rich text format) file instead of a printer.

Reverses black and white when printing.

Click this button to see a preview of the printed image.

Project information will be printed normally even if

Reverse black and white

is selected.

4. Click the

OK

Button.

The Print Dialog Box will be displayed.

5. Click the

OK

Button to start printing.

11-1

Section 11 Printing

11-1-1 Printing Samples

Some samples of printer output are shown below.

Project Information, Top of Each Page

The project file name and project title are printed.

Screen/Sheet Title Lists

Only the titles of screen pages that have been created are printed.

11-1 Printing Project Information

Alarm Setting List

High

Middle

Unit and Scale Settings

11-2

Section 11 Printing

Password Settings

System Data

11-1 Printing Project Information

11-3

Section 11 Printing 11-2 Printing Page Information

11-2 Printing Page Information

User screen information can be printed. The following information can be printed.

Item Details

Screen Hard Copy

Functional Object List

Property Setting

Prints a hardcopy of the screen.

Prints a list of the functional objects in each screen.

Prints a list of the properties of the functional objects in each screen.

1. Select

File - Print

.

2. The Print Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the

Page Information

Tab and select the range to be printed.

3. Select the information and ranges to be printed. (Click the

Details

Button to set the information to be printed.)

1

2

3

4

6

5

11-4

Section 11 Printing 11-2 Printing Page Information

No. Item

1 Include

Details

Select the information to be printed.

Click the

Details

Button to display the following dialog box and select the information to be printed.

2

3

4

5

Print Select the range of screens to be printed from the following options.

All

Pages

Prints information on all screens that are used.

Prints information on the specified screens.

Printing Items List Lists the items selected in No. 1, above.

Print to File

Inverse Print

Outputs the selected items to an RTF (rich text format) file instead of a printer.

Reverses black and white when printing.

Example:

Normal display

Reverse black and white display

Click this button to see a preview of the printed image. 6 Preview Button

4. Click the

OK

Button.

The Print Dialog Box will be displayed.

5. Click the

OK

Button to start printing.

Project information will be printed normally even if

Inverse Print

is selected.

11-5

Section 11 Printing

11-2-1 Printing Samples

Some samples of printer output are shown below.

Project Information, Top of Each Page

The screen page number and screen title are printed.

Screen Hard Copy

11-2 Printing Page Information

Functional Object List

Property Settings

The property settings on each tab page are printed.

11-6

Section 11 Printing 11-2 Printing Page Information

All property information for objects will be printed for property settings. This may result in a large number of pages being printed.

It is recommended that the Functional Object List is used to more efficiently check object settings.

The Functional Object List can be saved to a CSV file, which can also be printed.

Select

Tools - Functional Object List

, select the desired range, and click the

Save

Button to save the Functional Object List to a CSV file. Refer to

5-9 Listing Functional Objects Used

for details on operating procedures.

With data block tables, only the settings for each tab page in the Property Settings Dialog Box are printed. Settings for each data block field (e.g., communications addresses, data formats, keypads) are not printed.

11-7

Section 11 Printing 11-3 Previews

11-3 Previews

Previews can be displayed of the printer output for project information or page information.

1. Select the items to be printed in the Print Dialog Box.

2. Click the

Preview

Button.

A preview window will be displayed. Operating procedures for the preview window are the same as those for the standard Windows® preview window.

Example for Printing Page Information

3. To return to the Print Dialog Box from the Preview Window, click the

Print

Button in the Preview

Window.

The header and footer information can also be checked on the preview. Refer to

11-5 Headers and

Footers

for information on headers and footers.

To close the Preview Window and Editing Window, click the

Close

Button in the Preview Window.

11-8

Section 11 Printing 11-4 Outputting to an RTF File

11-4 Outputting to an RTF File

The selected project or page information can be printed to an RTF (rich text format) file. RTF files can be edited with MS Word and other word processing software.

The procedure for outputting to an RTF file is as follows:

1. Select the items to be output to the RTF file in the Print Dialog Box.

2. Select

Print to File

.

3. Click the

OK

Button.

4. The dialog box shown below will be displayed.

Specify the directory and file name where the RTF file will be saved, and click the

Save

Button.

11-9

Section 11 Printing 11-5 Headers and Footers

11-5 Headers and Footers

Headers and footers can be added to the documents to be printed.

The header is the margin at the top of the page and the footer is the space at the page where the page number, date, time, and text strings can be printed.

A sample of a printed header and footer is shown below.

(1) Date (2) Time (3) Project name (4) Page number (5) Text string

1 2 3 5

Header

00/05/0515:54:21 Project 1 Text

10

Text

Footer

4

5

1. Select the

Header

Tab or the

Footer

Tab in the Print Dialog Box.

2. Select the items to insert into the header/footer and the locations for the items.

1

2

11-10

Section 11 Printing 11-5 Headers and Footers

No. Item

1

Details

Position The insertion position for text strings in headers and footers can be set to left, center, or right.

2 Items Use the following procedure to set the items to insert.

1. Place the cursor at the insertion position.

2. Select the item to insert from the combo box and click the

Add

Button.

“&” followed by the printing item name will appear in the input field. "&" does not have to be added when inputting character strings.

Example: The following settings will produce the header and footer shown in the previous sample.

Header

Footer

11-11

Section 11 Printing 11-6 Margins

11-6 Margins

Set the distances from the edge of the paper to the printed characters. The project or page information will be printed inside the area bounded by the margins. The header and footer will be printed in the margins.

1. Select the

Margins

Tab of the Print Dialog Box.

2. Set the width of the top, bottom, left, and right margins.

1

2

No. Item

1 Units

Details

Select centimeters or inches for the margins set in item 2, below.

2 Margins Set the width of the top, bottom, left, and right margins.

Each margin can be set to between 0 and 10 centimeters (0 and 4 inches).

11-12

Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files

Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files

This section describes the methods used to import and export property information for functional objects as CSV files.

The CSV files that are exported can be edited using spreadsheet software or a text editor and then reimported to set functional object properties in a "batch" operation.

The following items can be edited in the CSV files.

Address settings

• Comment settings

Label settings

Functional objects cannot be added or deleted.

12-2 Editing CSV Files ....................................................................................................................................12-2

Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files 12-1 Exporting CSV Files

12-1 Exporting CSV Files

The property information for functional objects in the entire project or for selected screens can be exported to a CSV file.

1. Select

File - Export CSV File

.

2. The Export CSV File Dialog Box will be displayed.

Select the range to be exported and then click the

OK

Button.

Add a checkmark to start the spreadsheet software automatically and open the CSV file when it is exported.

A dialog box to specify the location in which to save the CSV file will be displayed.

Reference

When exporting CSV files on Windows 2000 or XP, Unicode or ASCII can be selected as the output code. To translate a label, for example from Japanese into Chinese, using Excel, select Unicode.

Unicode, however, is not supported for Windows 95, 98, and NT, i.e., the output code is always

ASCII (multibyte). Windows 2000 or XP is required to specify Unicode.

For details, refer to

13-2-3 Creating Multi-language Display Screens Using the CSV Import/Export

Function.

Reference

Edit CSV file after exporting

can be turned ON when exporting to the CSV file to automatically start the application associated with the CSV extension. If the executable file for the associated application cannot be found, the following error message will be displayed.

Specify the executable file to start the application and open the exported CSV file.

12-1

Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files 12-2 Editing CSV Files

12-2 Editing CSV Files

CSV files can be edited with spreadsheet software or a text editor.

In the CSV file, the labels, comments, and addresses set for the functional objects can be edited.

1. Open the CSV file that was exported to the spreadsheet software or text editor.

If

Edit CSV file after exporting

was turned ON when exporting to the CSV file, the spreadsheet software or text editor associated with the CSV extension will be started and the file will be opened automatically.

NS-Designer internal information

Project file name

Screen file name

Functional object types and settable properties

Screen page number

ID number

Property settings input field

Example 1: Changing the write address for an ON/OFF button from $B0 to $B10.

Example 2: Setting the label for a command button to "Screen 1."

2. After editing, confirm that the extension of the filename is CSV and save the file.

Reference

Objects and screens cannot be added or deleted from the CSV file.

When the file is closed, a message warning that some changes may be lost if the file is saved in the current format may be displayed. This will not adversely affect PT operation.

The file contains internal information required by the NS-Designer when the file is imported

(****VER3). Do not edit this information.

12-2

Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files 12-3 Importing CSV Files

12-3 Importing CSV Files

CSV files that have been edited externally can be reimported into the NS-Designer to change the property information of the entire project or selected screens. An error check will be performed on the

CSV file when importing.

1. Select

File - Import CSV File

.

2. The Import CSV File Dialog Box will be displayed.

Select the range to be imported and then click the

OK

Button.

3. A dialog box will be displayed to select the CSV file to import.

Specify the file and click the

Open

Button.

4. A dialog box to notify that the import operation has been completed will be displayed. Click the

OK

Button.

12-3

Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files 12-3 Importing CSV Files

Validation

An error list will be displayed if any errors are found during validation when importing. To edit the CSV file, click the

Edit CSV

Button. The spreadsheet software or text editor will be started and the imported CSV file will be opened.

Reference

Any of the following operations in CSV file editing will cause errors when importing a CSV file.

1. Deleting rows or columns

2. Adding rows or columns

3. Changing or deleting the NS-Designer internal information on line 1 (****VER3)

4. Changing project file names, screen page file names, or screen page numbers

5. Changing functional object ID numbers

6. Changing property names

3. NS-Designer internal information

4. Project file name

4. Screen page file name

5. Functional object ID number

4. Screen page number

6. Property name

Do not save CSV files in Unicode. An error will occur if CSV files saved in Unicode are imported.

12-4

Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files 12-3 Importing CSV Files

No.

Details

1

2

Displays the line number in the CSV file data where the error was found.

Displays the error number. Refer to the following table for details.

Error

No.

1

Details Countermeasure

Address or label setting is not correct.

1. Confirm that addresses are set within the range of the number of addresses set in the System Settings.

2. Confirm that the format of address settings is correct.

2 Format error in imported CSV file.

3. Confirm that none of the labels are too long.

Check that the imported file is in CSV format.

Close any unnecessary applications and re-execute the import operation.

4 ory. Settings contained in CSV file cannot be imported.

Could not open the

CSV file. CSV file could not be imported.

Check that the file is not being used by another application. If the file is being used by another application, close the file and then re-execute the import operation.

5 A project file name or screen file name specified in the

CSV file does not exist.

Refer to the following and insert the project file names or screen file names.

Row 1

Column A Column B Column C

1

Row 2

2

3

Columns are A, B, and C in order from the left. Rows are 1, 2, and

3 in order from the top.

1. The project file name is specified in the B column in the rows with a "1" in the A column. (The version is specified in row 1 of the B column, however, so the project file name is specified in row 2.)

Format: ***project name

Example: If the project name is "Test": ***Test

2. The screen file name is specified in the C column in the rows with a "2" in the A column. (The project file name is specified in row 1 of the B column, however, so the screen file name is specified in row 3.)

Format: **PNLPG screen page number/sheet page number.IPW

Screen page numbers are 3-digit hexadecimal numbers starting from 000.

Sheet page numbers are 3-digit hexadecimal numbers in the range FFF (page number 0) to FF6 (page number 9).

Example: If the screen page number is 16:

**PNLPG010.IPW

Example: If the sheet page number is 3: **PNLPGFFC.IPW

Details on the error that was detected will be displayed. The format is as follows:

Row number, screen page number, ID number, and error detection identifier

For the previous dialog box, there is a mistake in the CSV format of the Numeral Display Object with

ID number NUM0003 located on screen page number 0 on line 9.

12-5

Section 12 Importing/Exporting CSV Files 12-3 Importing CSV Files

Applying Attributes

When importing a CSV file of screen data that has been set using multiple label settings, the specified label attributes can be applied to all the labels.

1

2

No. Item

1 Apply the text attributes of specified label

No.

Details

Select to apply attributes. If the number of set labels is 1, this option is disabled.

2 Label Select the name of the label to which the attributes are to be applied.

Reference

The following items are affected when label properties are applied.

Font name

Font size

Font style

Vertical position

Horizontal position

Text color

If label attributes are applied to a CSV file that has been reedited, such as by adding screen data, and then imported after label attributes were applied, the label attributes will also be applied to the previous data for the selected label name.

12-6

Section 13 Multi-language Display

Section 13 Multi-language Display

This section describes the settings required for multi-language display on the PT screen using the label switching function or the indirect specification function, or by importing/exporting CSV files.

13-1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................13-1

13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens ...............................................................................................13-2

Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-1 Overview

13-1 Overview

Multi-language displays use Unicode for the character information displayed in a screen. This enables switching the screen between different languages, such as Japanese, English, and Chinese.

NS-series PTs use the label switching function, the object character string indirect reference function

(e.g., for list selection or text), and the CSV file import/export function to implement multi-language displays.

A computer environment (Windows 2000 or Window XP) that supports creating Unicode data is required for multi-language displays.

This section describes the settings required for multi-language display on the PT screen.

13-1

Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens

13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens

The following methods can be used to create screens that allow multi-language display.

1. Input multi-language characters in NS-Designer property settings.

2. Display multi-language characters using indirect object specification.

3. Create multi-language display screens using the CSV import/export function.

13-2-1 Inputting Multi-language Characters in NS-Designer Property

Settings

Settings on the PC

In order to create screen data with NS-Designer using the multi-language function, it is necessary to perform Windows settings beforehand. The settings are made from the Windows Control Panel. The actual settings required depend on the input language. Perform settings in the way indicated in the following table.

Language used

Japanese

Western European languages

(German, Spanish, etc.)

Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Hangul

Input method

IME (MS-IME, ATOK, etc.)

Character Map

On-screen Keyboard

IME (MS-PinYin98, etc.)

PC setting

Not required (Use standard setting.)

Not required (Use standard setting.)

Additional setting for input locale

Additional setting for input locale

(input system setting)

Note: The PC settings are used by other functions as well and so be sure to make these settings before creating a multi-language display screen.

Reference

Use Windows 2000 or XP when creating multi-language screen data with NS-Designer. The creation of multi-language screen data is not possible with Windows 95, 98, ME, or NT.

13-2

Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens

Setting the Input Locale for Western European Languages

The windows shown in the following explanations are for Windows 2000.

1. Open and select the Input Locales Tab Page. Click the

Add

Button.

In Windows XP, open

Control Panel – Regional Options

and select the Languages Tab

Page. Click the

Details

Button under

Text services and input languages

.

2. The following window will be displayed. Select the language to be input under

Input locale

(

Input language

in Windows XP) and click the

OK

Button.

3.

Switch between input locales

is automatically set under

Hot keys for input locales

. Also the

Enable indicator on taskbar

option at the bottom of the window is automatically selected. If the setting is

None

, change the setting with the

Change Key Sequence

Button (

Key Settings

Button in Windows XP).

13-3

Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens

the Button to complete the settings.

5. After completing the settings, confirm that the indicator in the bottom right-hand corner changes when the left Alt Key and Shift Key are pressed.

When inputting Japanese using MS-IME:

When inputting German using On-screen Keyboard:

In this example, German was added. Use the same procedure to add Spanish or any other western

European language. Set as many languages as required.

Setting the Input Locale for Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, and

Hangul

In order to input Asian languages, such as Chinese, the appropriate input system and fonts must be installed. As an example, the setting procedure required for inputting Chinese using MS-PinYin98 is explained below.

1. Setting the System Language

Add Chinese to the system language settings.

1. Open .

2. Under (

Code page conversion tables

in Windows XP), select the

Simplified Chinese

option and click the

OK

Button. The Windows CD-ROM may be required at this point. the Button is pressed, a prompt asking whether or not to restart Windows will be dis-

13-4

Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens

played. Restart Windows.

The fonts required to display Chinese characters will be displayed.

In this example, Simplified Chinese was added. Use the same procedure to add Traditional Chinese or

Hangul. Select Traditional Chinese and Korean in the list box.

2. Adding the Input Locale

1. Open

Control Panel – Regional Options

, select the Input Locales Tab Page, click the

Add

Button, and add Chinese under

Input locale

.

In Windows XP, open

Control Panel – Regional Options

, and select the Languages Tab

Page. Click the

Details

Button under

Text services and input languages

and add Chinese.

There are several types of Chinese input system (IME). In this example, the input system

MS-PinYin98 is selected.

Click the

OK

Button.

2.

Switch between input locales

is automatically set under

Hot keys for input locales

. Also the

Enable indicator on taskbar

option at the bottom of the window is automatically selected. If the setting is

None

, change the setting with the

Change Key Sequence

Button (

Key Settings

Button in Windows XP).

13-5

Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens

the Button to complete the settings.

4. After completing the settings, confirm that the indicator in the bottom right-hand corner changes when the left ALT Key and SHIFT Key are pressed.

When inputting Japanese using MS-IME:

When inputting German using On-screen Keyboard:

When inputting Chinese using MS-PinYin98:

Inputting Multi-language Characters in NS-Designer Property Settings

The method for inputting multi-language characters in NS-Designer property settings is explained below.

1) Inputting Multi-language Characters in Property Settings Using IME

1. Select the language to be input either after clicking the indicator on the Windows taskbar or by using the Alt and Shift Keys.

13-6

Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens

2. Input the required characters in the

Label

input box in the Property Settings Dialog Box for the required objects.

Reference

”IME” stands for “Input Method Editor” and is an input system for inputting special language characters from the keyboard. It can, for example, be used to convert characters to and from those used in Japanese. There are IME systems for different languages; for example, MS-IME2000 or ATOK can be used for Japanese and MS-PinYin98 can be used for Chinese. There are systems that come with Windows and systems that can be purchased separately. Refer to the software manual or help file for details.

2) Inputting Using the On-screen Keyboard

”On-screen Keyboard” is a standard Windows program that allows a keyboard to be displayed on the screen and characters to be input using this keyboard. It is started by selecting

Programs – Accessories – Accessibility – On-screen Keyboard

. Depending on the Windows setup, it may not be installed.

In this case, install it from

Control Panel – Add/Remove Programs – Add/Remove Windows Components

.

The following image is for input in English. If the input locale is switched to another language in the way mentioned later, the keyboard display will change accordingly.

13-7

Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens

3) Character Map

”Character Map” is a standard Windows program that allows characters to be selected from a list and then input into the application as desired. It is started by selecting

Programs – Accessories – System

Tools – Character Map

. Depending on the Windows setup, it may not be installed. In this case, install it from

Control Panel – Add/Delete Programs – Add/Delete Windows Components

.

The characters outlined in the following image are the western European characters that can be input with the NS Series. Regardless of the input locale setting mentioned later, these characters can always be input with NS-Designer.

Note: In some circumstances, the characters outside the outlined section may not be displayed on NS-Designer or the PT.

Character strings are input using the Character Map in the following way.

1. Insert the desired characters in

Characters to copy

by double-clicking them in order.

2. Once all the desired characters have been inserted, click the

Copy

Button.

3. Input the character string in the desired place in NS-Designer using Ctrl-V (i.e., press the Ctrl and

V Keys at the same time to copy the character string).

13-8

Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens

Reference

Unicode

Characters are input and displayed on a computer (not just with the NS Series), using a character code. Each character is assigned a number based on this code.

For example, the number 41 hex is assigned to the letter “A”. Sentences can be constructed, words can be arranged, and characters can be displayed on the screen using this code.

ISO has established a character code for alphanumeric characters (i.e., numbers and letters of the alphabet). Windows and the NS Series use the ISO8859/1 character code to represent characters for English, French, Italian, German, and other western European languages.

Asian languages, such as Japanese, Simplified Chinese, and Traditional Chinese use a large number of characters and there are character codes for these languages that have been defined by standards organizations (e.g., JIS in Japan and GB in China).

“Unicode” is a character code that was established with the purpose of unifying the various western

European and Asian languages. Windows NT, 2000, and XP as well the NS Series use Unicode to achieve multi-language display with ease.

13-2-2 Displaying Multi-language Characters Using Indirect Object

Specification

With the NS Series, multi-language display is created when Unicode-format text files for text objects and list objects with multi-language input are read. Also, with data block tables, reading/writing of data files is possible in Unicode format. Unicode format also allows multi-language display to be used for the log output of alarm/event history and the import/export of CSV files.

The objects for which data can be read or displayed using Unicode are given in the following table.

List objects

Text objects

Object name

Data block settings

Log output

Operation

Files storing character strings in Unicode format are read and displayed as lists.

Files storing character strings in Unicode format are read and displayed.

Data files are read and written.

CSV files edited in Unicode format can be imported and exported. Log output to CF is also possible.

In order to display multiple languages using indirect specification of object properties, the following settings are required.

1. Create the indirectly specified Unicode text.

2. In the Property Settings Dialog Box for the objects, set the character code to Unicode.

3. Specify the indirectly specified file name in the Property Settings Dialog Box.

13-9

Section 13 Multi-language Display

Text Objects

13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens

Data Block Objects

13-10

Section 13 Multi-language Display

Alarm/Event History

13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens

13-2-3 Creating Multi-language Display Screens Using the CSV Import/Export Function

This section describes the procedure for creating multi-language display screens using the CSV import/export function. The following diagram outlines the screen creation procedure.

Screen data CSV file Excel

1. Create English screen with NS-

Designer.

NS-Designer

English screen

Switch labels

Chinese screen

2. Export (Select

Unicode as the output code.)

CSV file

English labels

Select a text file as the file type to read the file.

Select commadelimited or text string.

3. CSV file

After editing the English and Chinese labels, save the file in Unicode format (.txt).

Have the English in the CSV file translated into Chinese.

4. Import

Text file

English labels

Chinese labels

Save

1. Setting the Number of Labels and Creating a Screen (Preparation)

Before creating a screen, set more than one for

No. of Labels

on the Project Property Dialog Box to switch languages during machine operation. Then, create a screen in English in the usual way.

13-11

Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens

(The number of labels can be changed after creating a screen.)

2. Exporting Screen Data

Export the created screen data to a CSV file using NS-Designer. When doing this, select Unicode as the output code.

3. Editing and Saving the File

Edit the CSV file with a version of Excel that supports Unicode (Excel 2000 or 2002). Make sure that the CSV file is loaded from the Open Dialog Box opened from the File Menu on Excel and opened by starting the Text File Wizard. If the CSV file is opened without starting the Text File Wizard (opened by drag-and-drop or by associating the file type with the program), according to Excel specifications,

Unicode data may not be loaded correctly and garbled characters and improper line-feed may appear.

Save the data as Unicode text (extension .txt).

4. Importing the Text File

Importing the converted file using NS-Designer completes creation of the multi-language display screen. Transfer it to the PT and confirm whether the input labels can be displayed correctly in each language by switching labels.

Procedure for Creating Screens

1. Create the screen data in English beforehand.

Open the Settings Menu and set the

No. of Labels

field in the Project Property Dialog Box to 2 min.

2. After creating the screen data, export the project data to a CSV file.

Select

Export CSV File

from the File Menu.

13-12

Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens

The following screen will be displayed. Select

Unicode

for the output code. the Button and specify the name of the file to be exported. Finally, click the

Save

Button to complete exporting the data to the CSV file.

3. Exported CSV files are read using Excel. Select

Open

from the File Menu in Excel and then select the CSV file to be edited in the dialog box. Specify

Text Files

in the

Files of type

field, and then open the selected file.

13-13

Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens

The will open. Select the format of the original data in the

Original data type

field and click the

Next >

Button to proceed to the next step.

Deselect in the

Delimiters

field, and select

Comma

. Click the

Next >

Button to proceed to the next step.

Select all the rows in the

Data preview

field, and select

Text

in the

Column data format

field.

13-14

Section 13 Multi-language Display 13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens

Input the translation details below the cell of the label name corresponding to the language to be used in the display.

After editing is completed, save the file. Specify

Unicode Text

in the

Files of type

field.

4. Import text files using NS-Designer. Always check whether the project is the pre-edited version before importing the file. When the dialog box for completing the import operation is displayed, screen creation allowing multiple display languages will be completed.

Open the project again with NS-Designer. When the label is switched, the translated version of the label will be displayed.

13-15

Section 13 Multi-language Display

Original language

13-2 Creating Multi-language Display Screens

Translated language

13-16

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendices

These appendices provide reference information for using the NS-Designer. Refer to them as required.

Appendix 1

Appendix 2

Appendix 3

Appendix 4

Appendix 5

Appendix 6

Appendix 7

Appendix 8

Appendix 9

Quick Reference ......................................................................................................................... A-1

Objects ...................................................................................................................................... A-12

Shortcut Keys............................................................................................................................ A-16

Version Information.................................................................................................................. A-17

Resource Report........................................................................................................................ A-18

Error Messages ......................................................................................................................... A-19

Connecting Cable Specifications .............................................................................................. A-26

Details of CLK Status ............................................................................................................... A-28

Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products ....................................... A-31

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 1 Quick Reference

Appendix 1 Quick Reference

This appendix lists where to look for information on the various functions of the NS-Designer.

"Programming Manual" refers to the

NS Series Programming Manual

(Cat. No. [email protected] ) and "Cross

Reference" refers to the

NS Series Cross-Reference

provided on the NS-Designer CD.

Fixed objects

Video display

Text display

Item

Displaying lines, arrows, and polylines

Displaying rectangles

Fixed Object - Rectangle

Displaying triangles, trapezoids, diamonds, and other polygons

Fixed Object - Polygon

Procedure

Fixed Object - Line

or

Polyline

Displaying circles and ovals

Fixed Object - Circle/Oval

Displaying an arc

Displaying a sector

Fixed Object - Arc

Fixed Object - Sector

Filling fixed objects

Reference

Section 5-2

Section 5-2

Section 5-2

Section 5-2

Section 5-2

Section 5-2

Tiling Tab Page on the Fixed Object Properties Dialog Box (

Settings - Object Properties

)

Programming

Manual Section 2-6

Displaying bitmap data Display a bitmap object (

Functional Object - Bitmap

).

JPEG files can also be displayed.

Programming

Manual Section 2-12

Section 5-13

Using the same fixed object in more than one application

Displaying special symbols and characters

Displaying the same graphic in many locations or on many screens

Changing displayed objects according to specified conditions

1. Select a registered object and then register it as an object in the library using

Tools - Register Library.

2. Display the library object using

Tools - Use Library.

1. Create image data using a BMP or JPEG file.

2. Display a bitmap object (

Functional Object - Bitmap

).

1. Select a registered object and then register it as an object in the library using

Tools - Register Library.

2. Display the library object using

Tools - Use Library.

1. Create bitmap objects (

Functional Object - Bitmap

).

Programming

Manual Section 2-12

Section 5-13

Programming

2. Indirectly specify the display files to change the bitmap that is

Manual Sec-

displayed based on PLC or PT status.

tion 2-12

Displaying video images

Displaying text that does not change

Changing displayed text based on PLC status

1. Display a word button object (

Functional Object - Word Button

).

Programming

Manual Section 2-9

2. Set

Select shape

for the button shape on the General Tab

Page.

3. Set the shapes to be displayed when the button is pressed, when it is not pressed, and when the set value matches on the Color/Shape Tab Page.

Display the images using a video display object (

Object – Video Display

).

Display the text with a text object (

Functional

Functional Object - Text

).

Programming

Manual Section 2-12

Programming

Manual Section 2-12

Use a String Display and Input object (

String Display & Input

).

Functional Object -

Programming

Manual Section 2-11

A-1

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 1 Quick Reference

Text display

Screen display

Item Procedure Reference

Changing displayed text based on PLC status

Changing the displayed screen using a button

(

1. Create a text object (

Functional Object - Text

).

Programming

2. Select

Indirect Reference of String

on the Label Tab Page.

Manual Sec-

The displayed text will change according to PLC or PT status.

tion 2-12

Create a command button object set to change the screen

Functional Object - Command Button

Screen

Screen n

).

Programming

Manual Section 2-9

PLC bit status display

Changing the displayed screen when a specified bit turns ON

Switch to a specific screen when a specified bit turns ON using the automatic screen change function in the alarm/event settings (

Settings - Alarm/Event Setting

).

Changing to a different screen based on

PLC or PT status when the screen is changed

Change the screen by writing the screen page number to $SW0 in system memory.

($SW0 in system memory contains the current screen page number.)

Programming

Manual Section 2-13

Programming

Manual Section 2-4

Create a command button object set to change the screen

Programming

(

Functional Object - Command Button

) and use indirect screen page number specification from the PLC or NT to control

tion 2-9

the screen page number according to PLC or PT status.

Manual Sec-

Creating screens with other screens overlaid

Turn ON the

Use as Pop-up Screen

setting on the Size/Pop-up

Tab Page of the screen properties (

Settings - Screen Proper-

on them

ties

).

Section 4-1

Creating a common screen to be used with

1. Create the common portion of the display as a sheet (

File -

Open Sheet

). many other screens

2. Apply the sheet (

File - Apply Sheet

) to display it on the required screens.

Section 4-3

Create the portion to be switched as a frame object (

Functional

Section 4-4

Object - Frame

).

Changing only a portion of the display based on PLC or PT status

Controlling a lamp based on PLC bit

ON/OFF status

Create a bit lamp object (

Functional Object – Bit Lamp

).

PT

Screen

PLC

Programming

Manual Section 2-10

Controlling a displayed object based on PLC bit ON/OFF status

Create bitmap objects (

Functional Objects - Bitmap

) and then indirectly specify the display files to change the bitmap that is displayed based on PLC status.

1. Create an ON/OFF button object (

Functional Object -

ON/OFF Button

).

2. Select

Select shape

for the button type and then specify the shapes to change to on the Color/Shape Tab Page.

Programming

Manual Section 2-12

Programming

Manual Section 2-9

Changing PLC bit

1. Create an ON/OFF button object (

Functional Object -

status by pressing a

ON/OFF Button

) and set the PLC bit as a write address. button and displaying the status by lighting a

2. Create a bit lamp object (

Functional Object - Bit Lamp

) and set the display address to the same PLC bit. lamp

Programming

Manual Section 2-9

A-2

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 1 Quick Reference

PLC bit status display

PLC word status display

Item Procedure Reference

Controlling displayed text based on PLC bit

ON/OFF status

1. Create an ON/OFF button object (

ON/OFF Button

).

Functional Object -

Programming

Manual Sec-

2. Turn ON the

Switch Labels for Address ON/OFF

setting on the Text Tab Page of the Properties Setting Dialog Box. Then

tion 2-9

select

Link with the Specified Address ON/OFF

and set the

PLC bit.

PT

Screen

PLC

ABC

DEF

When ON

Bit

When OFF

Controlling displayed text based on PLC bit

ON/OFF status

Create a text object and select

Indirect Reference of String

on the Label Tab Page. The displayed text will change according to

Manual Sec-

ON/OFF status of the PLC bit.

Programming tion 2-12

Displaying an alarm or 1. Set the display message and the PLC bit in the alarm/event event message based on PLC bit ON/OFF status settings (

Settings - Alarm/Event Setting

).

2. To display one line, create an alarm/event display object

(

Functional Objects - Alarm/Event Display

) and to display a list, create an alarm/event summary history object (

Functional Objects - Alarm/Event Summary History

).

Programming

Manual Section 2-13

PT

Screen

Alarm/Event Summary History

Alarm /Event1

Alarm /Event2

Alarm/Event Setting

Alarm /Event1

Alarm /Event2

PLC

Alarm/Event Display

Recording a history of

PLC bit ON/OFF status, saving it in the

PT, and displaying it for confirmation

Alarm /Event2

1. Set the display message and the PLC bit in the alarm/event settings (

Settings - Alarm/Event Setting

).

2. Create an alarm/event summary history object (

Functional

Objects - Alarm/Event Summary History

).

3. Select

Alarm history

for the display data on the General Tab

Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.

PT

Screen

Alarm/Event Summary

History

Alarm /Event1

Alarm /Event2

Alarm/Event Setting

Alarm /Event1

Alarm /Event2

PLC

Displaying numeric data

Use a numeral display and input object (

Functional Object -

Numeral Display & Input

). To prevent input, turn ON

Display

Expansion Tab

on the Control Flag Tab Page of the Property

Setting Dialog Box and disable input.

Programming

Manual Section 2-13

Programming

Manual Section 2-11

Displaying a level meter

Displaying an analogue meter

Create a level meter object (

Functional Object - Level Meter

).

Programming

Manual Section 2-12

Create an analogue meter object (

Functional Object - Analogue Meter

).

Programming

Manual Section 2-12

A-3

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

PLC word status display

Item

Displaying a brokenline graph

Appendix 1 Quick Reference

Procedure

Create a broken-line graph object (

Functional Object - Broken-line Graph

).

Reference

Programming

Manual Section 2-15

Displaying text string data

Displaying a data log graph

Create a String Display and Input object (

Functional Object -

String Display & Input

). To prevent input, turn ON

Display

Expansion Tab

on the Control Flag Tab Page of the Property

Setting Dialog Box and disable input.

Create a data log graph object (

Functional Object - Data Log

Graph

).

Changing the color of a lamp based on PLC word status

Create a word lamp object (

Functional Object - Word Lamp

).

The lamp can be switched among 10 colors.

Displaying detailed information and countermeasures by pressing an alarm/event summary history object

1. Turn ON the

Write Alarm ID to the Specified Address

setting on the General Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box for an alarm/event summary history object (

Functional Objects - Alarm/Event Summary History

) and set a write address for the PLC word.

2. Create text objects (

Functional Object - Text

).

3. Select indirect specification of the text string on the Text Tab

Page and set the same PLC word as set in step 1.

When an alarm or event occurs, an ID number will be written to the specified address and the text will be changed according to the value of the number.

NS

PLC

Programming

Manual Section 2-11

Programming

Manual Section 2-14

Programming

Manual Section 2-10

Programming

Manual Section 2-13

2.

ID write

Display

1.

2.

3

ID reference

Text string file

Label

Writing data to the PLC

Alarm/Event

Summary & History

Displaying recipe data 1. Create a data block table object (

Functional Object – Data

Block Table

).

Turning ON/OFF a

PLC from the PT

2. Set the data block to be displayed on the General Tab Page of the Property Settings Dialog Box.

Create a button that will turn ON/OFF the specified bit using an

ON/OFF button object (

Functional Object - ON/OFF Button

).

PT

Programming

Manual Section 2-16

Programming

Manual Section 2-9

Screen

PLC

ON/OFF

Bit address

A-4

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Writing data to the PLC

Appendix 1 Quick Reference

Item

Inputting numbers from a tenkey

Procedure

1. Create a numeral display and input object (

Functional Object - Numeral Display & Input

).

2. On the Keypad Tab Page of the numeral display and input property settings, set either

Standard system keypad

or

Large standard system keypad

as the input method.

Reference

Programming

Manual Section 2-11

Writing a constant with one button

1. Create a word button object (

ton

).

Functional Object - Word But-

2. Select

Set Value

for the button operation on the General Tab

Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.

Programming

Manual Section 2-9

PT

Screen

PLC

123 123

Numeral Display & Input

Word Button

Incrementing or decrementing a

1. Create a word button object (

ton

).

Functional Object - Word But-

value with buttons

2. Select

Increment/Decrement

for the button operation on the

General Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.

Set a negative value to decrement.

Inputting a value from a pop-up window

Inputting a value from a pop-up window

1. Create a numeral display and input object (

ject - Numeral Display & Input

).

Functional Ob-

2. On the Keypad Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box, select

Input from Pop-up Screen

.

Programming

Manual Section 2-9

Programming

Manual Section 2-11

Create a command button object on the specified pop-up window (

Functional Object - Command Button

).

Programming

Manual Sec-

Set

Key button

on the General Tab Page of the Property Setting

tion 2-9

Dialog Box.

Inputting from thumbwheel switches

Create thumbwheel switch object (

Functional Object -

Thumbwheel Switch

).

PT

Screen

PLC

-

1

+

-

2 3

+ +

123

Programming

Manual Section 2-11

Inputting from a virtual keyboard

1. Create a String Display and Input object (

Functional Object

- String Display & Input

).

2. On the Keyboard Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog

Box, set either

Standard system keypad

or

Large standard system keypad

.

Programming

Manual Section 2-11

Transferring a text string to a specific object when a button is pressed

1. Create a command button object (

Functional Object -

Command Button

).

2. Select

Keyboard

for the function selection on the General

Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.

3. To send a set string, select

Specification of String

.

Specified string

and to send a string that depends on the value of an address, select

Indirect

Programming

Manual Section 2-9

Writing recipe data to PLCs

1. Create a data block table object (

Functional Object - Data

Block Table

).

2. Set the data block to be written on the General Tab Page of the Property Settings Dialog Box.

Programming

Manual Section 2-16

A-5

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 1 Quick Reference

Writing data to the PLC

Item

Disabling writing numeral or text strings from PLC operations

Procedure

1. Create a numeral display and input object (

Functional Object - Numeral Display & Input

) or create a string display and input object (

Functional Object - String Display & Input

).

2. Turn ON

Display Expansion Tab

on the Control Flag Tab

Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box and set

Enable input on other screens

to

Indirect

. The specific bit can be used to enable and disable writing from the numeral display and input object or the string display and input object.

Reference

Programming

Manual Section 2-8

Input

PT

Screen

Numeral input field

456

PLC

Bit OFF

Functional objects with buttons

Creating an original 1. Create a command button object (

Functional Object -

tenkey and registering it as a library object

Command Button

).

2. Set

Key button

on the General Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box and create a button to send the specified text string or command code to the input field for the specified functional object.

Section 5-13

Programming

Manual Section 2-9

3. Select the entire tenkey and select

Tools - Register Library.

PT

Screen

Number input field

Input

123

7 8

4

1

5

2

9

6

3

CL

+-

Command buttons

(key function)

Changing a label using a button

1. Create a word button object (

Functional Object - Word But-

Programming

ton

).

Manual Sections 2-4 and

2. Select

Load Keyboard Screen

for the button operation on the

General Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box. Set the set value to the label switch number.

2-9

3. Set the $SW10 as the write address.

($SW0 in system memory contains the current label switch number.)

PT PLC

START START

Screen

English

"1" is written.

Japanese

English

Label switch number 0: Japanese

Label switch number 1: English

$SW10

A-6

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 1 Quick Reference

Functional objects with buttons

Item Procedure Reference

Transferring data between PLC words with

1. Create a command button object (

Functional Object -

Command Button

). a button

2. Select

Keyboard

for the function selection on the General

Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.

3. Select indirect specification of the text string and set the PLC source address.

Programming

Manual Sections 2-9 and

2-11

4. Create a String Display and Input object (

Functional Object

- String Display & Input

).

5. Set the PLC destination address for the address on the General Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.

6. Set the input method to

Other Input Method (command button etc)

on the Keyboard Screen Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box.

PT

String Display & Input

Screen

ABC

PLC

ABC

Destination

ABC

Source

Stopping the PT's buzzer with a button

Command button (key function)

1. Create a command button object (

Functional Object -

Command Button

).

2. Select

Stop buzzer

for the function selection on the General

Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box and create a button to stop the buzzer when pressed.

PT

Screen

Programming

Manual Section 2-9

Buzzer stopped

Using a button to close or move a popup screen

Command button

(buzzer stop function)

1. Create a command button object (

Command Button

).

Functional Object -

2. Select

Pop-up Screen Control

for the function selection on the General Tab Page in the Property Setting Dialog Box and create a button to control the pop-up screen.

Programming

Manual Section 2-9

Disabling a button from a PLC operation

1. Create a button.

2. Turn ON

Display Expansion Tab

on the Control Flag Tab

Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box and set

Enable input on other screens

to

Indirect

. The specific address can be used to enable and disable writing the specified address from

Programming

Manual Section 2-8

the button.

PT

Screen

PLC

Bit OFF

Input disabled

ON/OFF button, work button, or command button

A-7

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 1 Quick Reference

Item Procedure

Numeral display and input and thumbwheel switches

Displaying a tenkey in a pop-up screen by touching a numeral display and input object

1. Create a numeral display and input object (

Functional Object - Numeral Display & Input

).

2. On the Keypad Tab Page of the numeral display and input property settings, set either

Standard system keypad

Large standard system keypad

as the input method. or

PT

Screen

Numeral input field

123

Input

Reference

Programming

Manual Section 2-11

Placing more than one

1. Create a table object (

Functional Object - Table

). numeral display and input object on the

2. Set the movement direction for the

Enter Key

Focus Move Direction by

setting on the Property Setting Dialog Box for the same screen and table. moving the focus between them by pressing the Enter Key

Section 5-1

Restricting the range of numbers that can be input

Numeral Displaying the unit of display and input a numeric value and setting the scale for numeric data

Operations

Changing the screen grid

Copying objects that have been created

Automatically setting different addresses when copying and pasting functional objects

Operations

1. Create a numeral display and input object (

Functional Object - Numeral Display & Input

) or create a thumbwheel switch object (

Functional Object - Thumbwheel Switch

).

2. Turn ON

Display Expansion Tab

on the Max/Min Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box and set the range of numbers that can be input.

Programming

Manual Section 2-11

1. Create a numeral display and input object (

ject - Numeral Display & Input

).

Functional Ob-

Programming

Manual Sec-

2. Select

Unit

or

Scale

on the General Tab Page in the Property

Setting Dialog Box.

tion 2-11

Layout - Grid

1. Select the object to be copied.

2. Select

Edit - Copy.

3. Select

Edit – Paste.

Use ing.

Edit – Offset Paste

to specify the offset value when past-

Reusing screen data 1. Create a new screen (

File – New Screen

2. In the New Screen Dialog Box, select

).

Reuse Exiting Screen.

3. Select the project containing the screen to be reused in the

Reuse Exiting Screen Dialog Box.

Reusing screen data

4. Select the screen to reuse from the screen list.

To reuse a screen from the same project when creating a new screen, use

File - Select Template Project.

1. Select the screen to be copied.

2. Select

Edit - Select All - All Functional Objects/Fixed Objects.

3. Select

Edit - Copy.

4. Open the destination screen.

5. Select

Edit - Paste.

Section 4-1

Section 5-4

Section 5-4

Section 4-2

Section 3-7

Section 5-4

A-8

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Operations

Appendix 1 Quick Reference

Item Procedure

Grouping multiple objects as one object

1. Select all of the objects to group.

2. Select

Layout - Group.

Note: To return grouped objects to individual objects, select

Layout – Ungroup

.

Specifying an object behind another object

Try clicking in a different position to select the object behind.

Reference

Section 5-5

Section 5-4

Accurately aligning the positions of objects

1. Select the object in front.

2. Select

Layout - Order - Bring to Back.

3. Select the object that was previously behind.

1. Select all of the objects to be aligned.

2. Select

Layout - Align/Distribution

and then select the alignment method.

Section 5-5

Section 5-5

Changing a range of

PLC bits or words set for functional objects

Setting a range or comments, labels, or

PLC bits/words for functional objects

Pasting colors set for existing functional objects or fixed objects to other functional objects or fixed objects

Use the replacement function (

Edit - Replace

) to change a range of bits or words set for functional objects.

Section 5-4

1. Select the functional objects to be set. They must all be of the

Section 5-10

same type.

2. Use

Settings - Change Settings at Once.

1. Export the functional object property settings to a CSV file using

File - Export CSV File.

Section 12

2. Use spreadsheet software to set the properties.

3. Import the modified CSV file to NS-Designer using

File - Import CSV File.

1. Select the functional or fixed object from which to copy the color format.

2. Click the

Color Copy/Paste

Button on the Color Toolbar.

3. Click on the destination object.

Pasting the label font formats from an exist-

1. Select the functional or fixed object from which to copy the label font format. ing functional object to

2. Click the

Copy/Paste Font

Button on the Font Toolbar. another functional

3. Click on the destination object. object

Using an object that has been created in another screen or project

1. Select the object and register it in the library (

Library

2. Use

).

Tool - Use Library

Tool - Register

to position the object on the screen.

Section 2-5

Section 5-13

Creating multiple functional objects of the same type

1. Create the objects in a table object (

Functional Object - Table

).

Confirming PLC bit and word status

2. Select the type of object to be created in the table as the

Table type

in the Property Setting Dialog Box.

Used

Tool - List Up Addresses Used.

Checking the number of objects used on each screen

Use

Tools - List Up Functional Objects Used.

Finding addresses, comments, labels, or

PLC bits/words set for functional object.

Use

Edit - Find.

Reordering screens

Use the

Move Up

and

Screen Maintenance.

Move Down

Buttons under

Tools -

Section 2-5

Section 5-1

Section 5-11

Section 5-9

Section 5-4

Section 4-2

A-9

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 1 Quick Reference

Operations

Item

Copying screens

Procedure

Select the screen to copy and click the

Duplicate

Button under

Tools - Screen Maintenance.

Reference

Section 4-2

Deleting screens Select the screen to delete and click the

Delete

Button under

Tools - Screen Maintenance.

Use

View - Simulate ON/OFF.

Section 4-2

Checking the ON/OFF status of objects on screens created on the NS-Designer

Checking addresses set for functional objects on screens created on the NS-Designer

Use

View - Show Address.

Section 4-1

Section 4-1

Switching labels set for functional objects on screens created on the NS-Designer

Select the label to display under

View - Switch Label.

Switch between labels by selecting

Previous Label

or

Next

Label

from the object creation toolbar.

Use

Tools - Functional Object List.

Section 4-1

Section 4-1

Checking the settings of functional objects on a list

Finding duplicated settings of

PLC bits and words

Finding setting errors

Used

Tool - Address Cross Reference.

Section 5-9

Section 5-12

Displaying objects for which errors were detected in validation so that they can be easily found

Displaying the time and date

Use

Tools - Validation.

Use

View - Show Error Object.

Section 9

Section 4-1

Use

Functional Object - Date/Time.

Programming

Manual Section 2-17

Section 3-9

Selecting the language used for the PT’s system menus and dialog boxes

Select the language on the Select Language Tab Page of the

Project Property Dialog Box (

Settings

-

Project properties

).

Setting the time and date to display

1. Create a time/data object (

Functional Object - Date/Time

).

3. Input a new time and date into the dialog box to change the time and date.

2. Click the object during PT operation. A dialog box will appear to set the time and date.

Programming

Manual Section 2-17

Screen

2000/06/02

2000.06.02

Requiring passwords to input data for functional objects

Displaying a message dialog box when data is input for functional objects

1. Set the passwords under

Settings - Password Setting.

2. Turn ON

Display Expansion Tab

on the Password Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box and set the level of password to request.

Programming

Manual Section 2-8

1. Turn ON

Display Expansion Tab

on the Write Setting Tab

Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box for the functional object and turn ON

Display confirmation dialog when writing

.

2. Select

User Specified Message.

3. Click the

Edit Message

Button and set the desired message in the Message Setting Dialog Box.

Programming

Manual Section 2-8

Making functional objects flash 1. Make the settings for each flicker number under

Settings -

Flicker Setting.

2. Turn ON

Display Expansion Tab

on the Flicker Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box for the functional object and set the flicker number.

Programming

Manual Section 2-8

A-10

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 1 Quick Reference

Item

Making fixed objects flash

Testing project data offline

Copying project data

Procedure

Use the Duplicate Tab Page of the Project Maintenance Dialog

Box (

File - Project Maintenance

).

Reference

Use the Flicker Tab Page of the Property Setting Dialog Box for each object.

Programming

Manual Section 2-6

Use

Tool - Test.

Section 8

Section 3-8

Section 3-8

Deleting project data

Backing up project data

Use the Delete Tab Page of the Project Maintenance Dialog

Box (

File - Project Maintenance

).

Use the Backup Tab Page of the Project Maintenance Dialog

Box (

File - Project Maintenance

).

Restoring a project from backup data

Use the Restore Tab Page of the Project Maintenance Dialog

Box (

File - Project Maintenance

).

Section 3-8

Section 3-8

Copying project data to a floppy disk

Use the Backup Tab Page of the Project Maintenance Dialog

Box (

File - Project Maintenance

) and specify a floppy disk as the backup location.

Use the macro function. Performing calculations on the

PT

Changing the model of the NSseries PT

Use

Settings - Change PT Model.

Section 3-8

Section 6-1

Section 3-10

A-11

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 2

Object type

Switches

Objects

Object name

DIP switch, horizontal

DIP switch, vertical

Seesaw 1

Seesaw 2

Shape

Appendix 2 Objects

Seesaw 3

Selector

Micro switch 1

Micro switch 2

Lever

Pushbutton, round

Shape changes with status of address

ON

OFF

A-12

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Object type Object name

Shape changes with status of address

ON

OFF

Lamps Round

Shape changes with status of address

Octagon

Shape changes with status of address

Square

Shape changes with status of address

ON

OFF

Level meter

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Others Frame 1

Frame 2

Actuator

Graph

Shape

Appendix 2 Objects

A-13

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Object type

Others

Object name

Conveyor

Dialog box

Robot 1

Robot 2

Others

Shape

Appendix 2 Objects

Pipes and

Valves

Audio Switch

Tank

Valve (Handle)

Valve (Relief)

Pipe

Blower

A-14

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Object type

Pipes and

Valves

Object name

Hopper

Pump

Symbols Basic

Check Box

Arrow

Valve

Pipe

Shape

Appendix 2 Objects

Pump

A-15

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 3 Shortcut Keys

Appendix 3 Shortcut Keys

The following shortcut keys can be used with the NS-Designer.

Edit

Menu

File

Display

Settings

Layout

Tools

Function

New Screen

Open Screen

Save Screen

Transfer Data

Print

Undo

Redo

Ctrl + N

Ctrl + O

Ctrl + S

Ctrl + I

Ctrl + P

Ctrl + Z

Ctrl + Y

Shortcut keys

Cut

Copy

Paste

Offset Paste Ctrl + W

Delete Delete

Find Ctrl + F

Replace

All Functional Objects/Fixed Objects

Same Functional Objects

Previous Screen

Ctrl + X

Ctrl + C

Ctrl + V

Ctrl + H

Ctrl + A

Ctrl + D (when object is selected)

Shift + PageUp

Next Screen

Previous Frame Page

Next Frame Page

Shift + PageDown

PageUp (when frame is selected)

PageDown (when frame is selected)

Refresh F9

Object Properties Enter (when functional object is selected)

Edit Label Space (when functional object with label setting is selected)

Change Settings as a Batch

Move Up

Move Down

Move Left

Ctrl + K (when functional object is selected)

Up cursor key (when object is selected)

Down cursor key (when object is selected)

Left cursor key (when object is selected)

Move Right

Group

Ungroup

One dot shift

Validation

Validation Result

Functional Object List

Address Cross Reference

Test

Right cursor key (when object is selected)

Ctrl + G (when more than one object is selected)

Ctrl + U (when grouped objects are selected)

Ctrl +

,

,

, or

(when Snap to Grid is selected)

Ctrl + E

Ctrl + Q

Ctrl + L

Ctrl + R

Ctrl + T

A-16

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 4 Version Information

Appendix 4 Version Information

Information on the version of NS-Designer can be displayed.

Select

Help - About NS-Designer.

The NS-Designer Dialog Box will be displayed. The corresponding NS-Designer version number will be shown in place of x.xx.

Click the

OK

Button to close the dialog box.

A-17

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 5 Resource Report

Appendix 5 Resource Report

A resource report can be generated to display the file size of screen and sheet files (extension IPW).

Select

Tools – Resource Report

.

The Resource Report Dialog Box will be displayed.

1

2

No. Item

1 Transfer file information

2

3

4

Percentage used

Free space

Project size

3

4

5

Details

All file names in the project are displayed along with the file byte sizes and whether or not the file can be transferred.

All files that can be transferred are displayed, including project files, screen files, bitmap files used on the screens, text files, etc.

If the PT system version is 1.X, the maximum size of file that can be transferred is 1 Mbyte. Files that can be transferred to version-1.X PTs will be indicated as

"OK." Files that cannot be transferred to version-1.X PTs will be indicated as

"NG." If the system version is 2.0, there is no restriction on the size of files that can be transferred. Any files that are corrupted will be indicated as "ERR."

The percentage of the allowable project size is displayed.

If the percentage used is larger than 100%, file transfer will not be possible. Delete unnecessary files and data to maintain file sizes at less than 100%.

The available space in the PT with no project data transferred is displayed.

The total size of all files in the project is displayed.

A-18

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 6 Error Messages

Appendix 6 Error Messages

The error messages displayed on the NS-Designer are listed in the following table along with probable countermeasures (in alphabetical order).

Message

Address after replacement is not set.

Address input format is not correct. Input address again using correct format and applicable type (bit, word, etc).

Address is not set.

Address is not set.

Address setting after replacement is not correct.

Address type of start address and end address is not the same.

Address will exceed limit. Pasting aborted.

Background file error.

BMP file of the compressed format is not supported.

Cannot be set because there are already more than 160,000 Always log points.

NS5:

Cannot be set because there are already more then 120,000 Always log points.

Cannot be set because the logging holding capacity has been exceeded for the number of always logging points.

Countermeasure

Correctly designate the

start address after replacement

for replacement in the Replace Dialog Box.

Set the address using the correct format. The correct address can be set by using the Address Set Dialog

Box.

Set an address in the Address Dialog Box.

Sets the communications address.

Set the

start address after replacement

to a value within the proper address range.

Set the same type of address for the start address and the end address.

Check the range of addresses that can be set and repeat the operation so that the address range is not exceeded.

Check to see if the background file (BMP or JPEG) is corrupted.

Use a BMP file that is not compressed.

A maximum of 160,000 points can be set to be always logged (120,000 points for the NS5). Change the log timing in the Data Log Group Setting Dialog Box, reduce the number log points, or delete addresses until there are 160,000 or fewer points.

Cannot create a frame inside a frame.

Cannot create any more frames.

Cannot create any more new screens.

Cannot create any more screens.

Cannot create any more.

Cannot Delete the screen file stored in NS hardware.

Cannot establish connection with specified communications method.

Cannot find any project files in NS hardware.

A maximum of 50,000 points can be set to be always logged. Reduce the number of points to be always logged, i.e., change the logging periods or reduce the number of logs in the Data Log Group Setting Dialog

Box.

Position the frame outside any other frames.

Do not use more than 10 frames on one screen.

Create no more than 4,000 user screens in any one project.

Create no more than 4,000 user screens in any one project.

Create no more than 500 fields in any one data block.

The project in the PT may be set to read-only. Initialize data using

Screen data region format

on the Data Initialization Tab Page under System Menu and transfer the whole project.

Check the following items.

PT power supply.

Cable connection.

Is the PT started? (If it is not started, end the transfer program and start the PT.)

Make correct settings for unset items and connect again.

Resend the whole project.

A-19

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 6 Error Messages

Message

Cannot find Project file at NS hardware.

Transmit the whole project again.

Cannot open anymore screens. Close xxx to open new screen. Do you want to save the changes you made to xxx?

Cannot open COM port.

Countermeasure

Resend the whole project.

A maximum of 16 screens can be opened for simultaneous editing. Specify whether or not to save the applicable screen.

Close the other application and try the connection again.

Reset the PT and transmit the whole project again. Cannot perform transmission because the memory for transmission is insufficient.

Reset NS hardware and transmit the whole project again.

Cannot register data to 1 folder anymore.

(Max:4096). Register it to other folder.

Cannot restore to the currently edited project.

Cannot reuse the library object. It contains the function which is not supported in the current system version.

Cannot reuse the screen because the system project of source project is newer than current editing project.

Click the

New Category

Button in the Library Dialog

Box and create a new category to place the objects in.

Open another project or restart the NS-Designer and repeat the operation.

Confirm the version of the screen currently being edited and system versions for which the library object is supported.

Match the version of the source project and the project you are editing, and repeat the operation.

The version can be checked on the

Title

Tab Page of the

Project Properties

under the

Settings

in the NS-

Designer.

Always set screen number 0 as a base screen. Cannot set screen No. 0 as a pop-up screen.

Cannot set this address. Please set other address.

Cannot specify this project as a template because system version is newer than current editing project.

Cannot start up editor. Check the setting at

[Tools]-[Options]-[Editor].

Character string is not set.

Set a correct address.

Match the version of the template project with the project you are editing, and repeat the operation.

The version can be checked on the

Title

Tab Page of the

Project Properties

under the

Settings

in the NS-

Designer.

Specify the editor on the Editor Tab Page under

Tools

- Options

or check the specific executable file to be sure that it is correct.

Set the character string to search for in the Find Dialog

Box.

CSV file xx is not correct.(Line:xx Row:xx) Correct the specified line and row in the specified CSV file and then try and import it again.

Currently edited project cannot be deleted. Open another project or restart the NS-Designer and repeat the operation.

Data block table cannot be created on the frame.

Create data block table objects on normal screens.

Data block table cannot be created on the pop-up screen.

Data block table cannot be created on the sheet.

Data cannot be loaded. Check whether the

IPP file and project folder name are the same.

Use explorer or other search method to check whether a folder exists with the same name as the IPP file name.

A-20

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 6 Error Messages

Message

Downloading aborted. This Project includes the file which name contains invalid character. The characters that can be used are alphanumeric characters (0 to 9, A to Z, a to z), dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and.

Check and adjust project file.

End address is not set.

Countermeasure

There are limits on transferable file names. Check the error message and use NS-Designer to adjust the file name accordingly. There are similar limits on notation for text files indirectly accessed.

End page No. is out of range. Set a number from 0 to 3999.

End page No. is smaller than the start page

No.

End sheet number is out of range. Set a number from 0 to 9.

Error detected at NS hardware. (0x03a7)

Error occurred while writing to a flash memory. Transmission failed.

Exceeding maximum/minimum limit.

Failed to create new folder.

Failed to delete.

Failed to export CSV file.

Failed to get configuration information from the printer for NS-Designer. Settings cannot be performed for the printer.

Failed to import CSV file.

Failed to open communications with the

PLC. CX-Server reported an unknown error.

Failed to read file.

(Data Block (X) CSV File)

Failed to read project file.

Failed to register.

Failed to restore the project.

Failed to save file.

Correctly designate the end address for replacement in the Replace Dialog Box.

The end page number is 3,999. Set the end page number to a number between 0 and 3,999.

Set the start page number so that it is smaller than the end page number.

Sheet screen page numbers must be set in the range 0 to 9.

Set the sheet screen page number to a number between 0 and 9.

Contact your OMRON service representative.

Initialize data using

Screen data region format

on the

Data Initialization Tab Page under System Menu and transfer the project.

Set a number within the upper and lower limits.

The folder could not be created because of insufficient space on the hard disk.

Increase the available space on the hard disk and repeat the operation.

Check to see if the specified category or file has been opened by another application and repeat the operation. It is also possible that data has been corrupted.

The file could not be saved because of insufficient space on the hard disk. Increase the available space on the hard disk and repeat the operation.

This message is displayed when files containing information for printer settings cannot be obtained. Reinstall

NS-Designer.

Check to be sure that the file to be imported is in CSV format and repeat the operation.

Exit Screen Data Transfer of NS-Designer if this message appears on the CX-Server when connecting to the PLC to send the settings for the

Path Through

PLC

.

The specified CSV data file does not exist. Create a

CSV data file in the project folder.

The project file may be corrupted. If there is a backup file, restore the project file using the backup file under

Project Maintenance - File - Project Maintenance.

Check to see if the specified category in the library has been opened by another application and repeat the operation. It is also possible that data has been corrupted.

Not have any free space left.

Change the Restore Destination or increase the free space, and repeat the operation.

The file could not be created because of insufficient space on the hard disk. Increase the available space on the hard disk and repeat the operation.

A-21

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 6 Error Messages

Message

Failed to write a file.

(Data Block (X) CSV File)

Failed to write to a file. Check the free space and perform writing again.

Network No. is out of range. Set the number from 1 to 127.

No items are selected.

Failed to start the CX-Server.

Failed to process the CX-Server.

Failed to use.

Countermeasure

CX-Server may not be installed correctly. Refer to

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

and uninstall CX-

Server and then reinstall NS-Designer and CX-Server.

CX-Server may not be installed correctly. Refer to

Section 2 Setup, Starting, and Exiting

and uninstall CX-

Server and then reinstall NS-Designer and CX-Server.

Check to see if the specified category or file has been opened by another application and repeat the operation. It is also possible that data has been corrupted.

The specified CSV data file does not exist. Create a

CSV data file in the project folder.

The file could not be created because of insufficient space on the hard disk.

Increase the available space on the hard disk and repeat the operation.

The file is corrupted. Redo the file using backup data.

Set the output file name for the data log group to a name other than

Trend

.

File check sum error.

The specified filename has already been reserved in the System. Change the filename.

File not found. Please verify the correct file name was given.

File size exceeded the maximum. Please check the project data. (03a9)

File writing error occurred.

Frame size is not set. Please be sure to set this item.

Frame size is out of range. Please set the value from 0 to 16.

Functional objects overlap.

To permit overlapping, change the setting from [Tools]-[Options].

Import data of screen page No. xx is not found in CSV file xx.

Incorrect project is specified. Select correct project.

Incorrect value is set for node address. Set the value from 1 to 254.

Initialization of transmission library failed.

Memory for undoing /redoing operation is insufficient. Increase the free memory by closing other screens or exiting other applications etc.

More than 5,000 items have been set.

Correctly input an existing project name in the Open

Project Dialog Box.

The maximum size file that can be transferred is 1.44

MB. Re-execute the transfer with a file smaller than

1.44 MB.

Increase the available space in the computer.

Set the frame size on the Frame Tab Page in the Object Properties Dialog Box.

Set the frame size on the Frame Tab Page in the Object Properties Dialog Box to a number between 0 and

16.

As a rule, set functional objects so that they do not overlap. To permit overlapping, change the setting on the

Edit/Display Tab Page under

Tools - Options.

The number of screens defined in the import data is different from the number in the project into which the data is being imported. If there are fewer screens in the import data, temporarily move the extra screen files to a separate folder and repeat the operation.

Correctly input an existing project name for project maintenance.

Set an integer within the specified range for the node address in the Edit Host Dialog Box.

Reinstall the NS-Designer.

Increase the free memory by closing other screens or exiting other applications and then repeating the operation.

The maximum number of alarm/events that can be registered is 5,000. Reduce the number of alarms and events to 5,000 or less by deleting unneeded ones from the Alarm/Event Setting Dialog Box.

Set an integer within the specified range for the network number in the Edit Host Dialog Box.

Select an item and repeat the operation.

A-22

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 6 Error Messages

Message

No. of Address to find is out of range.

No. of functional objects inside a table exceeds the maximum limit (256).

Countermeasure

Reset the address to search for within the allowable range of addresses.

Reduce the number of items horizontally or vertically in the Table Setting Dialog Box so that the total number of functional objects is 256 or less.

Contact your OMRON service representative.

Restart the PT and make the new connection.

NS hardware error.

NS hardware is already connected. Restart the NS hardware to change the communication method.

Operation failed.

Other project exists in this directory. Cannot create new one.

Please ensure that the maximum limit is not smaller than minimum limit.

Please enter an integer between oo and oo.

Project cannot be specified as project name because it is being edited with NS-

Designer, which has been started up already

Project file differs between transmission source and destination. Select the whole project and perform transmission again.

Check to see if the specified category or file has been opened by another application and repeat the operation. It is also possible that data has been corrupted.

Specify another folder or create a new folder in which to save the project file.

The lower limit is higher than the upper limit. Make the correct limit settings.

Input an integer within the specified range.

Specify another project name, or stop editing the project with NS-Designer and save the project.

Project file name contains invalid character.

Usable characters are alphanumeric (0-9,

A-Z, a-z), dollar mark ($), underscore (_) and.

Project file name is too long. It should be within 42 characters.

Project name is not set.

Restore source data does not exist. Check the data.

Screen is not open.

Screen page No. is out of range. Set a number from 0 to 3999.

Screen size of download project is incorrect.

Set PT Memory ($B/$W) both for $SB/$SW

Allocation Address or set host memory (DM etc.) both for them.

Setting is not completed. Please be sure to set this item.

Individual screen data cannot be transferred for a different project when a project already exists in the PT

(or in the specified Memory Card bank). To transfer the screen data, transfer the entire project.

There are limits on transferable file names. Check the error message and use NS-Designer to adjust the file name accordingly. There are similar limits on notation for text files indirectly accessed.

There are limits on transferable file names. Check the error message and use NS-Designer to adjust the file name accordingly. There are similar limits on notation for text files indirectly accessed.

Specify the name of the project file to be processed.

Correctly input an existing project name for project maintenance.

Check to see if the specification for the restore source is correct.

Either select the entire project for the

Check When

setting on the Error Check Dialog Box or open the screens to be checked and repeat the operation.

Set the screen number to a number between 0 and

3,999.

Mount Expansion Memory to the PT or take other steps to increase the available memory in the PT.

Alternately, reduce the size of the screen data being transferred.

The screen data size can be confirmed using

Tools -

Resource Report.

Set the addresses for both $SB and $SW to PT memory addresses ($B and $W) or set them both to host memory addresses for the same host.

Specify a data block.

A-23

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 6 Error Messages

dress.

Message

Start address is larger than the end ad-

Start address is not set.

Start address setting is not correct.

Start page No. is out of range. Set a number from 0 to 3999.

Sheet page No. is out of range. Set a number from 0 to 9.

Specified file name contains invalid characters:

Alphanumeric (A-Z,a-z,0-9), underscore

(_), dollar mark ($), and period (,).

Specify the file name within 12 characters

(8+3 format).

The selected PT model and System Version do NOT match.

The setting data format is different.

The start sheet number is out of range. Set a number from 0 to 9.

The value is out of range.

The version of CSV file is newer than the project you are editing. Import CSV file cannot be performed.

Countermeasure

Set the sheet page number to a number between 0 and 9.

The specified file name contains illegal characters.

Change the file name to one that uses only the following characters.

Alphanumerics (A-Z, a-z, 0-9), underscores (_), dollar signs ($), and periods (.).

Specify a file name of 12 characters or less (8+3 format) when specifying file names in dialog boxes used to set properties, e.g., when making list selections.

Set the start address so that it is smaller than the end address.

Correctly designate the start address for replacement in the Replace Dialog Box.

Set a correct address.

Screen page numbers must be set in the range 0 to

3,999.

Set the screen page number to a number between 0 and 3,999.

Stop the test tool and then restart it. Test Tool is already started up. Cannot start Test.

The address is out of range.

The capacity of NS hardware is insufficient.

Transmission failed.

The data is created with NS-Designer Ver.

1.0. This needs to be converted to edit with

NS-Designer Ver. 6.2. When you convert the data to NS-Designer V1.1, it also can be operated with the system version 1.0.

Do you want to convert the data?

Set an address that is within range in the Address Dialog Box.

Reduce the amount of screen data and transfer the project again.

You are attempting to use NS-Designer Ver. 6.2 to edit a project that was saved using NS-Designer Ver. 1.0.

To convert the data from Ver. 1.0 to Ver. 1.1, which can be edited using NS-Designer Ver. 6.2, click the

Yes Button. To leave the data unconverted, click the

No Button and edit the project using NS-Designer Ver.

1.0.

Input a file name in the correct format. The file name is incorrect. Input correct file name.

The number of characters exceed the limit.

Set characters no more than X characters.

The object that cannot be arranged on the pop-up screen is contained.

Set no more than the specified number of characters.

Screens with video display objects or data block tables cannot be converted to pop-up screens. Either delete the video display objects and data block tables or do not perform the pop-up screen setting.

Select a PT model and System Version that match.

Refer to

Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different

Versions of NS-series Products

for details on supported combinations.

Check the data block field storage format and the setting data format.

Sheet screen page numbers must be set in the range 0 to 9.

Set the sheet screen page number to a number between 0 and 9.

Input a value within the correct range.

Check the NS-Designer version being used, upgrade to match the version of the CSV file, as required, and then import the CSV file again.

A-24

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 6 Error Messages

Message

This object can be created only one for each screen.

This program is already started up.

Time-out error occurred.

Check the cable. Perform transmission again after restarting NS hardware.

To reference a string indirectly, set both

File Name and Address for Selecting a

Line.

Total No. of Always log addresses exceeds the maximum limit of 50.

Total number of functional object will exceed the limit. Cannot continue operation.

Countermeasure

Only one video display object or data block table can be created per screen.

Multiple copies of the transfer program cannot be started. Use the transfer program that is already started.

Check the following items.

PT power supply.

Cable connection.

Is the PT started? (If it is not started, end the transfer program and start the PT.)

When transferring via serial communications, check the communications cable and the COM port that is being used. When using Ethernet, make sure that a PT with the node address specified for the transfer actually exists.

Specify both a file name for storing the text string and an address for specifying the file line on the Label Tab

Page in the Text Property Setting Dialog Box.

A maximum of 50 addresses can be set for standing logging. Either change the log timing in the Data Log

Group Setting Dialog Box or delete addresses that have been registered until there are 50 or fewer Always log addresses.

Do not use more than 1,024 functional objects on one screen.

Finding Out the Number of Functional Objects

The number of functional objects that is being used can be found using

Tools –

List Up Functional Objects Used.

Check the destination node.

Create video display objects on normal screens.

Transfer already in progress.

Video display cannot be created on the frame object.

Video display cannot be created on the pop-up screen.

Video display cannot be created on the sheet.

A-25

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 7 Connecting Cable Specifications

Appendix 7 Connecting Cable Specifications

There are three methods that can be used for data communications between the NS-Designer (computer) and the NS-series PT.

Serial communications

Ethernet

Memory Cards

Refer to the following information when preparing a connecting cable for the NS-Designer. A cable is not required if Memory Cards are going to be used.

A-7-1 Serial Cable

The cable is wired as described next depending on the type of RS-232C connector on the computer being connected.

Computers with a 25-pin Connector

Computer side PT tool connector

Shield wire

Connector hood Connector hood

Use the following products to assemble the connecting cable.

Name

Connector

Connector hood

Cable

Model

XM2D-2501

XM2A-0901

XM2S-2511

XM2S-0911

AWG28 x 5PIFVV-SB

CO-MA-VV-SB 5P x 28AWG

Remarks

25-pin connector by OMRON (for computer end)

9-pin connector by OMRON (for PT end)

25-pin connector by OMRON (for computer end)

9-pin connector by OMRON (for PT end)

Multi-core shielded cable (Fujikura Ltd.)

Multi-core shielded cable (Hitachi Cable Ltd.)

A-26

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Computers with a 9-pin Connector

Appendix 7 Connecting Cable Specifications

Computer side PT tool connector

Shield wire

Connector hood

Connector hood

Use the following products to assemble the connecting cable.

Name

Connector

Connector hood

Cable

Model

XM2D-0901

XM2A-0901

XM2S-0911

XM2S-0913

AWG28 x 5PIFVV-SB

CO-MA-VV-SB 5P x 28AWG

Remarks

9-pin connector by OMRON (for computer end)

9-pin connector by OMRON (for PT end)

9-pin mm-pitch screw by OMRON

9-pin inch-pitch screw by OMRON

Multi-core shielded cable (Fujikura Ltd.)

Multi-core shielded cable (Hitachi Cable Ltd.)

Note: Use a connector hood on the computer-end connector with screws that match the specifications of the connector on the computer.

A-7-2 Ethernet

Ethernet Connector Pin Arrangement

1

⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅

8

1

2

3

Pin number

TD+

TD

RD+

Signal name

4 NC

5 NC

6

RD

7 NC

8 NC

Name

Twisted-pair output (differential output)

Twisted-pair output (differential output)

Twisted-pair input (differential input)

Twisted-pair input (differential input)

A-27

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 8 Details of CLK Status

Appendix 8

Address

(start address = n)

n

Details of CLK Status

Bit Status

0 to 7

8

9

10

11

12

Error Information

Contents

Not used

1: Node address setting range error

1: Duplicate node address

1: Inconsistent network parameters

1: Hardware error

1: Communications controller send error n + 1 n + 2

15

0 to 7

8 to 15

Polling Node Address,

Startup Node Address

1: Error log exists

1: Polling node address

1: Startup node address n + 3 n + 4 n + 6

15

0 to 14

15

Local Data Link Participation

Status

Node 32

(Reserved)

Not used

0: Local node data link not participating or data link inactive

1: Local node data link participating

A-28

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Address

(start address = n)

n + 7

Bit Status

Data Link Status n + 8 n + 9 n + 10 n + 11 n + 12 n + 13 n + 14 n + 15 n + 16 n + 17 n + 18 n + 19 n + 20 n + 21 n + 22

0 to 7

8 to 15

0 to 7

8 to 15

0 to 7

8 to 15

0 to 7

8 to 15

0 to 7

8 to 15

0 to 7

8 to 15

0 to 7

8 to 15

0 to 7

8 to 15

0 to 7

8 to 15

0 to 7

8 to 15

0 to 7

8 to 15

0 to 7

8 to 15

0 to 7

8 to 15

0 to 7

8 to 15

0 to 7

8 to 15

0 to 7

8 to 15

Appendix 8 Details of CLK Status

Node 1

Node 2

Node 3

Node 4

Node 5

Node 6

Node 7

Node 8

Node 9

Node 10

Node 11

Node 12

Node 13

Node 14

Node 15

Node 16

Node 17

Node 18

Node 19

Node 20

Node 21

Node 22

Node 23

Node 24

Node 25

Node 26

Node 27

Node 28

Node 29

Node 30

Node 31

Node 32

Contents

n + 23

15

A-29

Node 16

Appendices

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Address

(start address = n)

n + 24

Bit Status

Appendix 8 Details of CLK Status

Contents

Node 32 n + 25

15 n + 26

15 Node 16

15

A-30

Node 32

Appendices Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products

NS-Designer Operation Manual

Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different Versions of

NS-series Products

The following tables show the data compatibility between different versions of NS-series products.

Hardware and System Program

The versions of the system program that can be installed in the PT vary with the model. The possible combinations are shown in the following table. Use a system program that can be installed for the hardware used.

NS5-V2

System Program Ver. 1.X

System Program Ver. 2.X

System Program Ver. 3.X

System Program Ver. 4.X

Supported

Supported

Supported

Not supported

V1/NS5-V1

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Supported (except for the NS5-V1)

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

System Program Ver. 5.X

System Program Ver. 6.0

System Program Ver. 6.2 Not supported Supported Supported

System Program and Screen Data Version

The versions of screen data that can be used on the PT depend on the version of the system program installed there. The “screen data version” is the version of the program selected when screen data is created on NS-Designer. The combinations that can be used on the PT are shown in the following table. Screen data versions are upwardly compatible.

Item System

Program

Ver. 1.X

System

Program

Ver. 2.X

System

Program

Ver. 3.X

System

Program

Ver. 4.X

System

Program

Ver. 5.X

System

Program

Ver. 6.0

System

Program

Ver. 6.2

Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Screen data version: Ver. 1.X

Screen data version: Ver. 2.X

Screen data version: Ver. 3.X

Screen data version: Ver. 4.X

Screen data version: Ver. 5.X

Screen data version: Ver. 6.0

Screen data version: Ver. 6.2

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Supported Supported Supported Supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Supported Supported Supported

Not supported

Not supported

Supported Supported

Not supported

Supported

A-31

Appendices Appendix 9 Converting Data between Different Versions of NS-series Products

NS-Designer Operation Manual

NS-Designer and Screen Data Version

The versions of screen data that can be read and created depend on the NS-Designer version. Convert the data as required with NS-Designer before reading it.

Item

Screen data version: Ver. 1.X

Screen data version: Ver. 2.X

NS-

Designer

Ver. 1.X

Reading supported

NS-

Designer

Ver. 2.X

Conversion to screen data version 2.X required

Reading supported

NS-

Designer

Ver. 3.X

Conversion to screen data version 2.X required

Reading supported

NS-

Designer

Ver. 4.X

Conversion to screen data version 2.X required

Reading supported

NS-

Designer

Ver. 5.X

Reading supported

Reading supported

NS-

Designer

Ver. 6.0

Reading supported

Reading supported

NS-

Designer

Ver. 6.2

Reading supported

Reading supported

Screen data version: Ver. 3.X

Screen data version: Ver. 4.X

Screen data version: Ver. 5.X

Screen data version: Ver. 6.0

Screen data version: Ver. 6.2

Reading not supported

Reading not supported

Reading not supported

Reading not supported

Reading not supported

Reading not supported

Reading not supported

Reading not supported

Reading not supported

Reading not supported

Reading not supported

Reading supported

Reading not supported

Reading not supported

Reading not supported

Reading not supported

Reading supported

Reading supported

Reading not supported

Reading not supported

Reading not supported

Reading supported

Reading supported

Reading supported

Reading not supported

Reading not supported

Reading supported

Reading supported

Reading supported

Reading supported

Reading not supported

Reading supported

Reading supported

Reading supported

Reading supported

Reading supported

A-32

Revision History

A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the cover of the manual.

Cat. No.

V074-E1-07

Revision code

The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the previous version.

Revision code Date Revised content

01 May 2002 Original production

Addition of Switch Box function

Contents revised to reflect the upgrade from version 2.0 to version 3.0

Addition of information related to the printing function

Addition of information related to “V1” models

Addition of information related to other version upgrades

06 February 2005 grade.

Addition of information related to NS5 PTs.

Addition of information related to NS-Designer Ver. 6.0 upgrade.

Addition of information related to the NS5-V2 Series.

Addition of information related to other version upgrades.

07 October

Notice:

Information on general precautions notation and copyright added before page P-1.

Read and Understand this Manual:

Information on liability and warranty added after P-3.

OMRON Corporation

Control Devices Division H.Q.

Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,

Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan

Tel: (81)75-344-7109/Fax: (81)75-344-7149

Regional Headquarters

OMRON EUROPE B.V.

Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp

The Netherlands

Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388

OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC

1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173

U.S.A.

Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568

OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.

83 Clemenceau Avenue,

#11-01, UE Square,

Singapore 239920

Tel: (65)6835-3011/Fax: (65)6835-2711

OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.

Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,

200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,

PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120 China

Tel: (86)21-5037-2222/Fax: (86)21-5037-2200

Authorized Distributor:

Cat. No. V074-E1-07 Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.

This manual is printed on 100% recycled paper.

Printed in Japan

Below is a list of articles with direct links to our shop Electric Automation Network where you can see:

• Quote per purchase volume in real time.

• Online documentation and datasheets of all products.

• Estimated delivery time enquiry in real time.

• Logistics systems for the shipment of materials almost anywhere in the world.

• Purchasing management, order record and tracking of shipments.

To access the product, click on the green button.

Product

Control system, CPU 640 E / S 20Kpasos 32KW

Control system, CPU 1280 Simplex E / S 30 KW 64 KW Data

Program

Control system, CPU 960 Simplex E / S 10KW 64 KW Data

Program

Operator Interface, ControllerLink card terminal NS10 /

12/15

Control system, CPU 160 E / S 5Kpasos 32KW

Operator interface, video input card for NS8 / 10/12/15, 2 channels + RGB

Control system, CPU 320 E / S 10Kpasos 32KW

Code

184020

Reference

CJ1M-CPU13

168305

168304

CS1D-

CPU44S

CS1D-

CPU42S

113739 NS-CLK21

184018 CJ1M-CPU11

180451 NS-CA002

184019 CJ1M-CPU12

113370 PT11

Basis for relay Base LY 11 pins 10A solder terminals

Operator interface, video input card for NS8 / 10/12, 4

Channels NTSC / PAL

147027 NS-CA001

Product link

Buy on EAN

Buy on EAN

Buy on EAN

Buy on EAN

Buy on EAN

Buy on EAN

Buy on EAN

Buy on EAN

Buy on EAN

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents